JP6839907B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

Conventionally, a game machine having a ball pulling function for pulling out a game ball supplied from an island facility for maintenance or movement of the game machine has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

However, with the same configuration as the conventional one, there is a risk that the interest of the player may be reduced.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-086442 (Fig. 4)

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

The present invention
A gaming machine that draws lots based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and gives profits based on the result of the lottery.
A light emitting portion capable of emitting light during the execution of the effect relating to the result of the lottery is mounted, and a light emitting decorative substrate provided with a white reflection improving region capable of improving the reflection effect on the substrate surface is provided.
The light emitting decorative substrate includes a front light emitting decorative substrate and a rear light emitting decorative substrate arranged behind the front light emitting decorative substrate.
The reflection improving region is at least a surface portion of the surface portion of the rear light emitting decorative substrate on which the light emitting portion is mounted and a surface facing the surface portion, and the light emitting portion of the surface portion of the front light emitting decorative substrate. It is provided on the back side where the part is not mounted,
Further, a translucent member having translucency is provided on the back surface side of the front light emitting decorative substrate.
The translucent member is fixed to the front light emitting decorative substrate on the back surface side of the front light emitting decorative substrate, and further extends outward from the edge of the back surface portion of the front light emitting decorative substrate. It has an extended translucent part and
The extended light-transmitting portion may be located in front of the rear-emitting decorative substrate so that light from the light-emitting portion of the rear-emitting decorative substrate can be transmitted.
It is characterized by that.
Further, as an invention different from the present invention, the following means will be disclosed for reference.
Means 1: In a game machine
"The game area where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player, and
Front view A decorative member arranged in the game area and decorated on the outer surface, and a support shaft protruding downward by a predetermined length from a portion eccentric with respect to the center of gravity at the lower end of the decorative member. With the decoration unit that you have
A rotary drive unit base having an upper bearing portion and a lower bearing portion that rotatably support the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the support shaft of the decorative unit, and attached to the rotary drive unit base. It is provided with a rotary drive unit having a drive motor that rotates the support shaft according to a game state that changes when the game medium is driven into the game area. " Game machine.

Here, the "decorative member" includes "a plate-shaped member having two sides facing each other", "a polygonal columnar member", and "a two sides having a quadrangular outer shape and facing back". , "A member consisting of a plurality of decorative bodies that are hinged and rotatably attached to each other on one of the two vertically extending sides", "A member provided with an effect display device capable of displaying an effect image", etc. Can be mentioned.

The "predetermined length" of the support shaft is "0.5 to 1 times the height of the decorative member" and "0.6 to 0.9 times the height of the decorative member". , "The length is 0.7 to 0.8 times the height of the decorative member", and the like.

Further, examples of the "upper bearing portion" and the "lower bearing portion" include a "sliding bearing" and a "rolling bearing", and a "thrust bearing" may be used as the "lower bearing portion".

In addition, "according to the game state" means "a game to a reception port (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, a large winning opening, a character winning opening, a V winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area). "According to the acceptance of the medium", "According to the gaming medium driven (injected) into the gaming area passing through a specific area (for example, gate, warp passage, stage, etc.)", "Reception (For example, according to the lottery result drawn by accepting the game medium to the start port) "," according to the rotation of a plurality of rotating bodies that rotate triggered by the input of the game medium "," the input of the game medium Multiple rotating bodies that have rotated as an opportunity are stopped in sequence, and according to the combination of symbols displayed on the stopped rotating bodies, "according to the type of production determined by lottery such as starting prizes," "entering the game area. "According to the amount of the game medium to be driven", "Depending on the length of the driving blank of the game medium to be driven into the game area", and the like.

Further, as a configuration in which the support shaft is rotated by the drive motor, "a mechanism including a shaft gear provided on the support shaft and a drive gear that meshes with the shaft gear and is rotated by the drive motor" and "on the support shaft "Mechanism that directly connects the rotating shaft of the drive motor", "Mechanism equipped with a shaft pulley provided on the support shaft and a drive pulley that is rotated by the drive motor with a belt wrapped around the shaft pulley", etc. Can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 1, a game area in which the game medium is driven by the operation of the player, a decorative member arranged in the front view game area and decorated on the outer surface, and a decorative member. A decorative unit having a support shaft protruding downward by a predetermined length from a portion eccentric with respect to the center of gravity at the lower end of the decorative unit, and the upper end and lower end of the support shaft of the decorative unit are rotatably supported, respectively. It is attached to the rotary drive unit base having the upper bearing portion and the lower bearing portion, and the rotary drive unit base, and is attached to the rotary drive unit base according to the game state that changes when the game medium is driven into the game area. It is provided with a rotary drive unit having a drive motor for rotating the support shaft.

As a result, when the player drives the game medium into the game area to change the game state, the drive motor of the rotary drive unit is driven to rotate the support shaft of the decorative unit according to the changed game state. Since the decorative member arranged in the front view game area via the support shaft rotates around the axis extending vertically at a position eccentric from the center of gravity, for example, the decorative member can be moved from a normal state. By rotating it 180 degrees, in addition to being able to show the front side and the back side of the decorative member, it is also possible to move it closer to or farther from the center of the front view game area, showing the player a variety of effects. Can be entertained. At this time, the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the support shaft protruding downward from the lower end of the decorative member are rotatably supported by the upper bearing portion and the lower bearing portion of the rotary drive unit base, respectively. Since the bearings are rotatably supported at two locations that are vertically separated from each other, the support shaft protrudes from the position eccentric with respect to the center of gravity, and an eccentric load that tries to tilt the support shaft acts. However, the support shaft can be made difficult to tilt, the support shaft can be supported straight and the decorative member can be rotated, and the load from the decorative member is shared between the upper bearing portion and the lower bearing portion. By receiving the bearing, the uneven wear can be reduced and the decorative member can be rotated in a good state for a long period of time, and the effect using the decorative member can be entertained by the player and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. ..

Further, the support shaft is rotatably supported at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof at two places, the upper bearing portion and the lower bearing portion of the rotary drive unit, and as described above, the load of the decorative member is two. Since the bearings are shared and supported at the same place, even if the decorative member is heavy, it can be rotatably supported. Therefore, by enlarging the decorative member, it is possible to make the decorative member stand out and make it easier for the player to attract the attention of the player. By providing the game, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in the interest in the game.

The decorative member may be provided with an effect display device capable of displaying the effect image, whereby when the display screen of the effect display device is directed toward the player in front, the effect image is displayed on the display screen. By displaying the display and showing it to the player, the player can be entertained by the directed image, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. Further, when facing from a part of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative member of the display screen of the effect display device, the display screen of the effect display device can be visually recognized or cannot be visually recognized from the player side depending on the rotation stop position of the decorative member. Since the effect display device can be visually recognized, the effect image can be enjoyed, and the surface (back surface) opposite to the effect display device can be visually recognized. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by suggesting the arrival of an opportunity to the player, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, after having the lower gear near the lower end of the support shaft, the lower drive gear that meshes with the lower gear is attached to the rotating shaft and is centered in the left-right direction of the front view game area with respect to the support shaft. A lower drive motor as a drive motor may be mounted on the side closer to. As a result, under normal conditions, the lower end of the support shaft is rotatably supported by a force that causes the lower end of the support shaft to move (fall) toward the center of the game area due to the load from the decorative member. It can be received by the lower bearing portion of the drive unit base and the lower drive motor, and the support shaft can be prevented from falling and the decorative member can be supported in a good state.

Further, the decorative member may be formed into a quadrangle and rotated about the axis of the support shaft on one side of the two sides extending vertically, whereby the swivel range of the decorative member can be expanded in a plan view. Since the target is widened, the movement of the decorative member due to rotation becomes large and becomes more noticeable, and the player can be made aware of the movement of the decorative member and pay attention to the decorative member. You can do it. Further, in this case, for example, with one surface (front surface) of the decorative member facing forward, the decorative member is rotated 180 degrees via the support shaft so that the opposite surface (back surface) is directed forward. In this state, the movement distance of the decorative member in the left-right direction becomes as long as possible, and the decorative member can be moved to a moved position by approximately the same distance as the size of the decorative member in the left-right direction from the initial position. It is possible to move a large amount between the unobtrusive position and the obstructive position of other members (for example, the effect display means capable of displaying the effect image), and rearward according to the position (game state). The members can be made to stand out and the decorative members can be made to stand out, and various effects can be presented to the player to make the game machine that the player does not get tired of.

Further, it is desirable that the length of the support shaft is within the range of 0.5 to 1 times the height of the decorative member, whereby the support shaft protrudes from the position eccentric from the center of gravity of the decorative member. As a result, even if an eccentric load acts from the decorative member, the decorative member can be rotatably supported via the support shaft in a good state without tilting, and a gaming machine that reliably achieves the above-mentioned action and effect is realized. can do.

Further, the first decorative body and the decorative member, which have different decorations on two sides having a quadrangular outer shape and facing backwards, are hingedly rotatably attached to each other on one of the two vertically extending sides. It may be composed of a second decorative body, and the support shaft may be projected downward from either the first decorative body or the second decorative body. As a result, when the support shaft is rotated by the drive motor of the rotary drive unit according to the gaming state, the first decorative body and the second decorative body and the second decorative body are passed through the one in which the support shaft protrudes. (Ii) When the decorations rotate together and stop the rotation, the support shaft does not protrude depending on the positional relationship and rotation direction between the first decoration and the second decoration that are rotatably attached to the hinge. The first decorative body or the second decorative body is hinge-rotated by an inertial force. Therefore, when the decorative member is rotated in an appropriate direction via the support shaft by the drive motor, the first decorative body and the second decorative body are rotated together in a superposed state, opened from the superposed state, or opened. Since it is possible to superimpose from the superposed state, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and from the superposed state, the first decorative body and the second decorative body. By opening the door, the decorative member can be enlarged, the decorative member can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Can be made to.

In this case, the support shaft is rotatably attached to the upper end of the support shaft after protruding from the second decorative body coaxially with the axis of rotation of the hinge, and the first decorative body is attached to the outer periphery of the shaft. It is desirable to further have a rotation transmission member provided with an upper gear and an upper drive motor as a drive motor in which the upper drive gear meshing with the on-axis gear is attached to the rotation shaft. As a result, when the lower drive gear is rotationally driven by the lower drive motor, the second decorative body is rotated, and when the upper drive gear is rotationally driven by the upper drive motor, the first decorative body is rotated. The first decorative body and the second decorative body can be rotated separately by the drive motor and the lower drive motor, and depending on the positional relationship between the hinge-rotatable first decorative body and the second decorative body, they are superimposed. The first and second ornaments that are open can be opened, the first and second ornaments that are open can be overlapped and closed, and the first and second ornaments can be rotated together. Therefore, it is possible to present a colorful effect to the player, and it is possible to make the player less bored and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. At this time, it is desirable to arrange the upper drive motor on the side far from the center of the front view game area, whereby, under the normal state, the upper end side of the support shaft is moved from the center of the game area by the load from the decorative member. The force to move (fall) in the direction of moving away can be received by the upper bearing part of the rotary drive unit base that rotatably supports the upper end and the upper drive motor, making the support shaft hard to fall and decorating. The member can be supported in good condition.

Further, a slide unit that slides and moves the rotation drive unit in the left-right direction according to the game state may be provided, whereby the decorative member is moved in the left-right direction by the slide unit via the rotation drive unit according to the game state. By appropriately combining the rotation of the decorative member by the rotation drive unit and the slide of the decorative member by the slide unit, it is possible to make various effects using the decorative member. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, an effect display means such as a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying an effect image may be provided substantially in the center of the front view game area, and the decorative member may be rotated at a position in front of the effect display means. In addition to the effect of the decorative member, the effect image displayed on the effect display means can also be entertained by the player. In addition, the decorative member is eccentrically rotated so that the decorative member can be used as the effect display means in the front view. It can be made to stand out from the player side by moving away from or approaching the display screen, and it is possible to surely enjoy the production by the decorative member and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1.
"The decorative member is
It is characterized by having an effect display device capable of displaying an effect image.

Here, examples of the "effect display device" include a "liquid crystal display device", an "organic EL display device", an "LED display device", a "plasma display device", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the decorative member is provided with an effect display device capable of displaying an effect image.

As a result, since the decorative member is provided with an effect display device capable of displaying the effect image, when the display screen of the effect display device is directed toward the player in front, the effect image is displayed on the display screen for the game. By showing it to a person, the player can be entertained by the directed image, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, when facing from a part of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative member of the display screen of the effect display device, the display screen of the effect display device can be visually recognized or cannot be visually recognized from the player side depending on the rotation stop position of the decorative member. Since the effect display device can be visually recognized, the effect image can be enjoyed, and the surface (back surface) opposite to the effect display device can be visually recognized. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by suggesting the arrival of an opportunity to the player, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as described above, the load of the decorative member is shared and supported in two places by rotatably supporting the upper bearing portion and the lower bearing portion of the rotary drive unit at the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the support shaft. Therefore, even if the decorative member is heavy, it can be rotatably supported. Therefore, even if the decorative member is provided with a relatively heavy effect display device, the decorative member can be rotated in a good state. It can be supported, and it can be a gaming machine that surely achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2.
"The decoration unit is
It further has an under-axis gear attached near the lower end of the support shaft.
The rotary drive unit is
The lower drive gear that meshes with the lower gear of the decorative unit and the lower drive gear are attached to the rotary shaft, and the rotary drive unit base is attached to the left and right sides of the game area in a front view from the support shaft. It further has a lower drive motor as the drive motor mounted on the side closer to the center of the direction. "

According to the configuration of the means 3, the decorative unit is provided with an under-axis gear attached near the lower end of the support shaft, and then the rotary drive unit is engaged with the under-axis gear of the decorative unit. The lower drive gear and the lower drive gear are mounted on the rotary shaft, and the lower drive as a drive motor is mounted on the rotary drive unit base closer to the center of the game area in the left-right direction in front view than the support shaft. It also has a motor.

By the way, when arranging a movable decorative member in the front view game area, in a normal state, the decorative member is arranged at a position away from the center of the game area, and moves to a position closer to the center of the game area according to the game state. By making it movable, the decorative members are made to stand out and attract the attention of the player. When the decorative member is rotatably supported at a position eccentric with respect to the center of gravity, the center of gravity of the decorative member is in the game area with respect to the support shaft for rotatably supporting the decorative member in a normal state. The decorative members will be arranged so that they are located far from the center. Therefore, in this normal state, due to the load from the decorative member, the support shaft tends to fall in the direction in which the upper end side moves away from the center of the game area, in other words, the support shaft falls in the direction in which the lower end side approaches the center of the game area. Try to.

On the other hand, in this means, the lower drive gear attached to the rotating shaft of the lower drive motor is meshed with the lower gear provided at the lower end of the support shaft from the side near the center of the front view game area. Since the support shaft is rotated by the lower drive motor, it should be moved (fallen) toward the center of the game area acting on the lower end side of the support shaft due to the load from the decorative member under normal conditions. The force to be generated can be received by the lower bearing portion of the rotary drive unit base that rotatably supports the lower end portion and the lower drive motor, so that the support shaft does not easily fall and the decorative member is supported in a good condition. Can be done.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3.
"The decorative member is
It is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and
The support shaft
It is characterized in that it protrudes downward from one side of the two sides extending vertically of the decorative member.

According to the configuration of the means 4, the outer shape of the decorative member is made into a quadrangle extending vertically, and the support shaft is projected downward from one side of the two sides extending vertically of the decorative member. It is a thing.

As a result, the decorative member is made into a quadrangle and is rotated around the axis of the support shaft on one side of the two sides extending vertically, so that the turning range of the decorative member is possible in a plan view. Because the width of the decorative member becomes wider, the movement of the decorative member due to rotation becomes larger and more noticeable, and the player can be made aware of the movement of the decorative member and pay attention to the decorative member. be able to. At this time, since the support shaft of the decorative unit is rotatably supported at two places on the upper and lower ends, the support shaft is supported on the two sides extending vertically on which the eccentric load from the decorative member acts greatly. Even if it is projected from one side, it can be sufficiently supported so that the support shaft does not tilt, and the effect of using the decorative member can be surely exhibited to entertain the player.

Further, since the decorative member is rotated on one side extending vertically, for example, the decorative member is 180. When the opposite surface (back surface) is turned forward by rotating the degree, the movement distance in the left-right direction of the decorative member becomes as long as possible, which is almost the same as the size of the decorative member in the left-right direction from the initial position. Since the distance can be moved to the moved position, it can be greatly moved between the unobtrusive position and the obstructive position of other members arranged behind (for example, the effect display means capable of displaying the effect image). It is possible to make the rear member stand out or the decorative member stand out according to the position (game state), and it is possible to present various effects to the player so that the player will not get tired of it. can do.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4.
"The support shaft is
The length is 0.5 to 1 times the height of the decorative member. "

Here, the predetermined length of the support shaft is 0.5 to 1 times (preferably 0.6 times to 0.9 times, more preferably 0.7 times to 0.8 times) the height of the decorative member. If the length is shorter than this, the eccentric load from the decorative member acting on the lower end (lower bearing) of the support shaft becomes too large, and the configuration is simple. This is because it is difficult to sufficiently support an inexpensive bearing mechanism and a defect may occur at an early stage. If the length is longer than this, the vertical dimension of the rotary drive unit becomes too large. Therefore, the degree of freedom of installation becomes low and it becomes difficult to arrange the decorative member at a desired position, or the rotary drive unit becomes large in a limited space, so that the decorative member becomes relatively small and decorated. This is because there is a risk that the members will not be conspicuous and sufficient decorative effects and directing effects may not be obtained.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the length of the support shaft is 0.5 to 1 times the height of the decorative member.

As a result, the length of the support shaft is set within the range of 0.5 to 1 times the height of the decorative member, so that the support shaft protrudes from the position eccentric from the center of gravity of the decorative member for decoration. Even if an eccentric load acts from the member, the decorative member can be rotatably supported via the support shaft in a good state without tilting, and it is possible to embody a game machine that surely achieves the above-mentioned action and effect. it can.

Means 6: In any one of means 1 to 5,
"The decorative member is
Consists of a first and second ornaments that are quadrangular in shape and have different decorations on two sides facing each other, and are hinged and rotatably attached to each other on one of the two vertically extending sides. Has been
The support shaft projects downward from either the first decorative body or the second decorative body. "

According to the configuration of means 6, the decorative members are hingedly attached to each other on one of the two vertically extending sides, having different decorations on two sides that are quadrangular in outer shape and facing backwards. It is composed of a first decorative body and a second decorative body, and a support shaft is projected downward from either the first decorative body or the second decorative body.

As a result, when the support shaft is rotated by the drive motor of the rotary drive unit according to the gaming state, the first decorative body and the second decorative body and the second decorative body are passed through the one in which the support shaft protrudes. (Ii) When the decorations rotate together and stop the rotation, the support shaft does not protrude depending on the positional relationship and rotation direction between the first decoration and the second decoration that are rotatably attached to the hinge. The first decorative body or the second decorative body is hinge-rotated by an inertial force. Therefore, when the decorative member is rotated in an appropriate direction via the support shaft by the drive motor, the first decorative body and the second decorative body are rotated together in a superposed state, opened from the superposed state, or opened. Since it is possible to superimpose from the superposed state, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and from the superposed state, the first decorative body and the second decorative body. By opening the door, the decorative member can be enlarged, the decorative member can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Can be made to.

At this time, by forming the decorative member with the first decorative body and the second decorative body that are hinged and rotatably attached to each other, even if the weight of the decorative member increases and the eccentric load acting on the support shaft increases. Since the support shaft is rotatably supported at the upper and lower ends, it can be sufficiently supported so that the support shaft does not tilt due to the eccentric load acting from the decorative member. It is possible to entertain the player by surely exerting the effect of the decorative member composed of the two decorative bodies.

In addition, since the position of the center of gravity of the decorative member is moved by opening and closing the first decorative body and the second decorative body that are rotatably attached to the hinge, the positions of the first decorative body and the second decorative body. The eccentric load acting on the support shaft changes depending on the relationship, but as described above, since the support shaft is rotatably supported at the upper and lower ends, the eccentric load acting on the decorative member changes. However, the support shaft can continue to be rotatably supported in a good state without tilting, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

As a specific movement (directing) by the first decorative body and the second decorative body that are rotatably attached to the hinge, the first decorative body and the second decorative body are superposed on each other and closed. Only one of the first decorative body or the second decorative body is rotated so that the first decorative body and the second decorative body are opened side by side, or the first decorative body and the second decorative body are superposed on each other. In the closed state, the first decorative body and the second decorative body are rotated together to make the back surface facing backward in the state before the rotation, or the first decorative body and the second decorative body and the second decorative body are facing forward. In the state where the decorations are open side by side, the first decoration and the second decoration are rotated together to make the back side facing forward in the state before the rotation, or the back side facing forward. With the one decoration and the second decoration open side by side, rotate only one of the first decoration or the second decoration so that the first decoration and the second decoration overlap each other and close. It is possible to make an operation (directing) such as putting it in a state of being present.

Then, when the first decorative body and the second decorative body are placed in a closed state in which the surfaces of the first decorative body and the second decorative body are overlapped with each other and the surfaces are opened side by side, the decoration by the first decorative body and the second decorative body is performed. The surface is expanded (expanded) in the front view game area, and the surface that is closed and cannot be seen from the player side is opened so that the surface can be seen from the player side. Since the decoration range can be expanded and the decoration can be changed, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the first decoration body and the second decoration body, and the first decoration is made. The decoration spread by the body and the second decorative body can be enjoyed, and the player can be made to think that there is something good, which raises the expectation for the game and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, when the first decorative body and the second decorative body are rotated together in a closed state in which the first decorative body and the second decorative body are overlapped with each other, the first decorative body and the second decorative body Since the hinge rotates around one side that is rotatably attached, when the surface (back surface) that was facing backward in the initial state is rotated so that it faces forward, the first decorative body and the first (Ii) The overall position of the decoration moves to the position opposite to the central axis of hinge rotation. As a result, the area of decoration by the first decorative body or the second decorative body in the front-view game area can be moved, and the decoration visible from the player side can be changed, which is of interest to the player. Can be strongly attracted to the first decorative body and the second decorative body, and the movement and decoration of the first decorative body and the second decorative body can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, in a state where the first decorative body and the second decorative body are superposed on each other and closed, one of the first decorative body and the second decorative body is rotated to open, or the first decorative body and the second decorative body are opened. In either case, when the first decorative body and the second decorative body are rotated together, the surfaces of the first decorative body and the second decorative body that can be seen from the player side start to rotate. It is difficult to tell whether the two decorations will open or rotate together, and it will be exciting and exciting for the player to decide which action to take, raising the player's expectation. be able to. Further, with respect to the decoration that can be visually recognized in the initial state, the decoration that can be visually recognized from the player side when the first decoration body and the second decoration body are opened and when they are rotated together. Since the changes will be different, it is possible to entertain the player with the change of decoration in various patterns, and it is possible to make the player less bored by various productions.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 6,
"The support shaft is
It protrudes downward from the lower end of the second decorative body on the same axis as the axis of rotation of the hinge to which the first decorative body and the second decorative body are attached, and
The rotary drive unit is
A sleeve portion rotatably attached to the upper end portion of the support shaft and rotatably attached to the upper bearing portion of the rotary drive unit base, and the first decorative body protruding upward from the sleeve portion. A rotation transmission member having an on-axis gear formed on the outer periphery of the sleeve portion and a connecting portion attached to the sleeve portion.
An upper drive gear that meshes with the on-axis gear of the rotation transmission member,
The upper drive gear is attached to the rotary shaft and further has an upper drive motor as the drive motor attached to the rotary drive unit base. "

According to the configuration of the means 7, the support shaft is projected downward from the lower end of the second decorative body on the same axis as the axis of rotation of the hinge to which the first decorative body and the second decorative body are attached, and then rotationally driven. The sleeve part, which is rotatably attached to the upper end of the support shaft and rotatably attached to the upper bearing part of the rotary drive unit base, protrudes upward from the sleeve part and is attached to the first decorative body. A rotation transmission member having an on-axis gear formed on the outer periphery of the connecting portion and the sleeve portion, an upper drive gear meshing with the on-axis gear of the rotation transmission member, and an upper drive gear on the rotation shaft. It is further provided with an upper drive motor as a drive motor that is attached and attached to the rotary drive unit base.

As a result, when the lower drive gear is rotationally driven by the lower drive motor as the drive motor according to the gaming state, the support shaft is rotated by the lower gear that meshes with the lower drive gear, and the support shaft is projected. The second decorative body of the member will rotate. On the other hand, when the upper drive gear is rotationally driven by the upper drive motor as the drive motor according to the gaming state, the rotation transmission member is rotated around the support shaft at the upper end of the support shaft by the on-axis gear meshing with the upper drive gear. The first decorative body attached to the connecting portion of the rotation transmission member rotates. Since the support shaft is arranged coaxially with the axis of the hinge rotation that attaches the first decorative body and the second decorative body to each other, the first decorative body and the second decorative body and the second decorative body are operated by the upper drive motor and the lower drive motor. The ornaments can be rotated separately, and depending on the positional relationship between the hinge-rotatable first and second ornaments, the overlapping first and second ornaments can be opened. , The open first decoration and the second decoration can be overlapped and closed, or the first decoration and the second decoration can be rotated together, giving the player a colorful effect. It can be presented, and it is possible to make the player less bored and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Means 8: In the configuration of means 7,
"The upper drive motor is
It is characterized in that it is attached to a side farther from the center in the left-right direction of the game area in a front view than the support shaft.

According to the configuration of the means 8, the upper drive motor is mounted on the side far from the center of the game area in the left-right direction in the front view from the support shaft.

By the way, when arranging a movable decorative member in the front view game area, in a normal state, the decorative member is arranged at a position away from the center of the game area, and moves to a position closer to the center of the game area according to the game state. By making it movable, the decorative members are made to stand out and attract the attention of the player. When the decorative member is rotatably supported at a position eccentric with respect to the center of gravity, the center of gravity of the decorative member is in the game area with respect to the support shaft for rotatably supporting the decorative member in a normal state. The decorative members will be arranged so that they are located far from the center. Therefore, in this normal state, the support shaft tends to fall in the direction in which the upper end side moves away from the center of the game area due to the load from the decorative member.

On the other hand, in this means, the upper drive gear attached to the rotating shaft of the upper drive motor is engaged with the on-axis gear provided at the upper end of the support shaft from the side far from the center of the front view gaming area. Since the support shaft is rotated by the upper drive motor, let's move (fall) away from the center of the game area that acts on the upper end side of the support shaft due to the load from the decorative member under normal conditions. The force can be received by the upper bearing of the rotary drive unit base that rotatably supports the upper end and the upper drive motor, making it difficult for the support shaft to fall and supporting the decorative member in good condition. Can be done.

At this time, a lower drive motor is provided with a lower gear at the lower end of the support shaft, and a lower drive gear that meshes with the lower gear is attached to the rotating shaft on the side of the support shaft near the center of the front view game area. By arranging it, the lower end can be rotated by a force that causes the load from the decorative member to move (fall) toward the center of the game area acting on the lower end side of the support shaft under normal conditions. It can be received by the lower bearing part of the rotary drive unit base and the lower drive motor that support it, and the support shaft can be made even more difficult to fall down in combination with the above-mentioned action and effect on the upper end side, and it is decorated. The member can be rotatably supported in good condition. Further, in this case, the upper drive motor is attached to the side far from the center of the game area and the lower drive motor is attached to the side closer to the center with the support shaft in between, so that the upper drive is driven in the rotary drive unit base. The motor and the lower drive motor do not interfere with each other, and it is possible to easily embody a game machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Means 9: In any one of the configurations from means 1 to means 8.
It is characterized in that it further includes a slide unit that slides and moves the rotation drive unit in the left-right direction according to the gaming state.

Here, the "slide unit" includes "a slide guide in which the rotary drive unit is slidably attached in a direction along the surface of the game panel, and a rack gear that is attached to the rotary drive unit and extends in the slide direction. , A unit equipped with a pinion gear that meshes with the rack gear and a drive motor that rotationally drives the pinion gear according to the game state "," A base with a rotary drive unit and a drive pin, and a base Has a slide guide that is slidably attached in the direction along the surface of the game panel, and a drive slit on the tip side where the drive pin is slidably inserted, and the base end side is rotatably attached. A unit equipped with a rod-shaped drive arm and a drive motor that rotationally drives the drive arm according to the game state "," A drive slit that is equipped with a rotary drive unit and extends in a direction that intersects the sliding direction It has a base, a slide guide that slides the base in the direction along the surface of the game panel, and a slide guide that is rotatably attached and slidable to the drive slit at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. A unit including a crank member having a drive pin to be inserted and a drive motor for rotationally driving the crank member according to a gaming state, and the like can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 9, the gaming machine is further provided with a slide unit that slides and moves the rotation drive unit in the left-right direction according to the gaming state.

As a result, the decorative member can be slid and moved in the left-right direction by the slide unit via the rotary drive unit according to the game state. Therefore, the rotary drive unit rotates the decorative member and the slide unit slides the decorative member. By appropriately combining the above, it is possible to make the production using the decorative member various, to make the player less bored, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Means 10: In the game machine
"The game area where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player, and
Front view A second side that is arranged within the game area, has a square outer shape and has different decorations on two sides facing backwards, and is hinged and rotatably attached to each other on one of the two sides extending vertically. A decorative member including a decorative body and a second decorative body, and an effect display device attached to at least one of the first decorative body and the second decorative body and capable of displaying an effect image, the decorative member. The height of the decorative member from the lower end on one side of the two vertically extending sides of the second decorative body coaxially with the axis of rotation of the hinge to which the first decorative body and the second decorative body are attached. A decorative unit having a support shaft that is 0.5 to 1 times as long as the hinge and protrudes downward, and an under-axis gear that is attached near the lower end of the support shaft.
A sleeve portion rotatably attached to the upper end portion of the support shaft of the decorative unit, a connecting portion protruding upward from the sleeve portion and attached to the first decorative body, and an outer periphery of the sleeve portion are formed. A rotation transmission member including an on-axis gear, an upper bearing portion and a lower bearing portion that rotatably support the sleeve portion of the rotation transmission member and the lower end portion of the support shaft of the decorative unit, respectively. A rotary drive unit base having a portion, a lower drive motor and a rotary drive unit base attached to the rotary drive unit base closer to the center in the left-right direction of the game area in front view than the support shaft. In addition, the game is composed of an upper drive motor mounted on a side far from the center in the left-right direction of the game area when viewed from the front of the support shaft, and changes when the game medium is driven into the game area. A drive motor that is rotationally driven according to a state, a lower drive gear that is attached to the rotating shaft of the lower drive motor of the drive motor and meshes with the lower gear, and rotation of the upper drive motor of the drive motor. A rotary drive unit that is attached to a shaft and has an upper drive gear that meshes with the on-shaft gear of the rotation transmission member.
It is provided with a slide unit that slides and moves the rotation drive unit in the left-right direction according to the gaming state. "

According to the configuration of the means 10, the game machine is provided with different decorations on two sides, one is a game area in which the game medium is driven by the operation of the player, and the other is arranged in the front view game area and the outer shape is square and faces backward. It is attached to at least one of the first decorative body and the second decorative body, and the first decorative body and the second decorative body, which have and are hinge-rotatably attached to each other on one of the two sides extending vertically. A decorative member equipped with an effect display device capable of displaying an effect image, and up and down in the second decorative body coaxially with the axis of rotation of the hinge to which the first decorative body and the second decorative body of the decorative member are attached. It is attached to the support shaft that protrudes downward from the lower end on one side of the two sides extending to the bottom with a length of 0.5 to 1 times the height of the decorative member, and near the lower end of the support shaft. A decorative unit having an under-axis gear, a sleeve portion rotatably attached to the upper end of the support shaft of the decorative unit, and a connecting portion protruding upward from the sleeve portion and attached to the first decorative body. And an upper bearing that rotatably supports the rotation transmission member having the on-axis gear formed on the outer periphery of the sleeve portion, the sleeve portion of the rotation transmission member, and the lower end portion of the support shaft of the decorative unit. A rotary drive unit base having a portion and a lower bearing portion, and a lower drive motor and a rotary drive unit base mounted on the rotary drive unit base closer to the center in the left-right direction of the game area in front view than the support shaft. It is composed of an upper drive motor mounted on the side far from the center in the left-right direction of the game area when viewed from the front of the support shaft, and responds to the game state that changes when the game medium is driven into the game area. A drive motor that is rotationally driven, a lower drive gear that is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower drive motor of the drive motor and meshes with the lower gear of the shaft, and a rotary shaft of the upper drive motor of the drive motor that transmits rotation. It is provided with a rotary drive unit having an upper drive gear that meshes with an axial gear of the member, and a slide unit that slides the rotary drive unit in the left-right direction according to a gaming state. ..

As a result, when the player drives the game medium into the game area to change the game state, the lower drive motor and upper drive motor of the rotary drive unit and the slide unit are used to decorate the game according to the changed game state. The first decorative body and the second decorative body, which are members and are hingeably attached to each other, can be rotated together in a superposed state, opened from a superposed state, or superposed from an open state. The first decorative body and the second decorative body can be slid to the left and right, and the surface of the first decorative body and the second decorative body facing the effect display device is made visible from the player side. Since it is possible to show the effect image to the player at times, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player to entertain, and it is possible to make the player less bored. At this time, the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the support shaft extending downward from the lower end of the side extending vertically and rotatably attached to the hinge of the second decorative body are referred to as the upper bearing portion of the rotary drive unit base. Since it is rotatably supported by the lower bearing and rotatably supported at two positions as far apart as possible, the support shaft protrudes from the position eccentric with respect to the center of gravity. Therefore, even if an eccentric load that tries to tilt the support shaft acts, the support shaft can be made difficult to tilt, the support shaft can be supported straight and the decorative member can be rotated, and the upper bearing portion can be rotated. By sharing the load from the decorative member at two places, the lower bearing and the lower bearing, uneven wear can be reduced and the decorative member can be rotated in good condition for a long period of time. Can be entertained by the player and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, the length of the support shaft is set within the range of 0.5 to 1 times the height of the decorative member, and the upper bearing portion and the lower bearing portion of the rotary drive unit are formed at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. Since it is rotatably supported in two places and the eccentric load acting on the support shaft is shared and supported in two places, it has a first decorative body, a second decorative body, and an effect display device. Even if the decorative member becomes heavy, the support shaft can be rotatably supported in a good state without tilting.

Further, at the lower end of the support shaft, the lower drive gear attached to the rotating shaft of the lower drive motor is meshed with the lower gear from the side near the center of the front view game area, and the support shaft is moved to the lower drive motor. Under normal conditions, the lower drive motor receives a force that causes the lower drive motor to move (fall) toward the center of the game area that acts on the lower end side of the support shaft due to the load from the decorative member. be able to. On the other hand, at the upper end of the support shaft, the upper drive gear attached to the rotating shaft of the upper drive motor is meshed with the on-axis gear from the side far from the center of the front view game area, and the support shaft is moved to the upper drive motor. In a normal state, the upper drive motor exerts a force that causes the upper drive motor to move (fall) away from the center of the game area that acts on the upper end side of the support shaft due to the load from the decorative member. Can receive. Therefore, in addition to the lower bearing portion and the upper bearing portion of the rotary drive unit base, the lower drive motor and the upper drive motor also receive the force (uneven load) that causes the support shaft to fall. Can be made more difficult to fall down, and the decorative member can be rotatably supported in a good state via the support shaft.

Further, the first decorative body and the second decorative body of the decorative member are attached to each other so as to be hinge-rotatable, and the upper drive motor and the lower drive motor are attached via the rotation transmission member and the support shaft coaxially with the axis of the hinge rotation. Since the first decorative body and the second decorative body can be rotationally driven separately, the first decorative body and the second decorative body can be rotated together in a superposed state, or the first decorative body can be rotated together in a superposed state. One of the decorative body and the second decorative body is rotated to open the first decorative body and the second decorative body side by side, or the first decorative body and the second decorative body are opened side by side. Either one of the first decorative body and the second decorative body can be rotated and superposed (closed), and by presenting a variety of effects to the player, it is entertained and the deterioration of the interest in the game is suppressed. be able to.

Further, assuming that the first decorative body and the second decorative body are overlapped with each other and the first decorative body and the second decorative body are opened side by side, the decoration by the first decorative body and the second decorative body is performed. Since the decoration of the member is doubled in size, the decorative member can be made to stand out and surprise the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, since the first decorative body and the second decorative body that are rotatably attached to each other are rotated by the support shaft and the rotation transmission member coaxially with the axis of hinge rotation, for example, With the first decorative body and the second decorative body superimposed and one side surface (surface) facing forward, the first decorative body and the second decorative body are rotated 180 degrees together via the support shaft. When the opposite surface (back surface) is turned to the front, the moving distance in the left-right direction of the superimposed first and second decorative bodies becomes as long as possible, and the first position is changed from the initial position. Since the decorative body and the second decorative body can be moved to a moved position by approximately the same distance as the lateral size of the decorative body and the second decorative body, other members arranged behind (for example, an effect display means capable of displaying an effect image). It is possible to move a large amount between the unobtrusive position and the obstructive position, and the rear member is made to stand out or the first decorative body and the second decorative body are made to stand out according to the position (game state). It is possible to present a variety of effects to the player to make it a game machine that the player does not get tired of.

Further, in the rotary drive unit, the upper drive motor is mounted on the side far from the center of the game area and the lower drive motor is mounted on the side closer to the center with the support shaft in between. The upper drive motor and the lower drive motor do not interfere with each other, and it is possible to easily embody a game machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Means 11: In any one of the gaming machines from Means 1 to Means 10.
It is characterized by being a pachinko machine.
Here, the pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which the input medium, which is a medium that the player puts into the game machine, and the game medium, which is the medium used for the actual game performed by the player, are the same. , A type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been thrown in. Specifically, "a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a large number of obstacle nails, accessories, display means, etc. are incorporated, and a start winning opening and a large winning opening , Passing port, arrival port, etc., a game area provided with an appropriate entry port for the game ball to enter, a rail for guiding the game ball from the launcher to the game area, and entry of the game ball guided to the game area. It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the ball entering into the ball opening or depending on the mode of entering the game ball into a plurality of entrances. "

There are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally referred to as "digi-pachi machines" and are represented by "ball-entry state detecting means (game state detection) for detecting the ball-entry state at the ball-entry port." (It can also be regarded as a means), a lottery means that performs a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the ball entry state detection means, and a special pattern that changes and stops the change according to the lottery result of the lottery means. "Equipped with a symbol display means" and "In addition, while the special symbol is changing, a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols is variablely displayed, and the symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol sequence, a character, various articles, etc. "Anything further equipped with an effect display means for displaying an appropriate effect by drawing the display object and operating the display object, etc.", and "inside the character" represented by what is generally called a "splash machine". One game is played by a predetermined number of game balls such as 16 pieces, which is typified by "a lottery means for drawing lots by sorting the game balls" and "alepachi machine". An example of "a device that pays out a predetermined number of game balls according to a mode in which the game balls enter a plurality of entrances in a game" can be exemplified.

According to the configuration of the means 11, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted in the pachinko machine.

Means 12: In any one of the gaming machines from Means 1 to Means 10.
It is characterized by being a pachislot machine.
Here, the pachi-slot machine is such that a medal, which is an insertion medium, is inserted, and after the medal is inserted, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn are rotated by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Then, the game is such that the symbol sequence composed of each reel or the like is variablely displayed, and then the variable display of each symbol string is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button). It is what is done. In other words, it can be regarded as a slot machine with a stop operation function. If the stop operation means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time. Then, when the variable display of each symbol string is stopped, the displayed single symbol is a specific symbol, the combination of the symbols displayed in each symbol string is a specific combination, and so on. When the conditions are met, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied conditions, or a special advantageous state is generated which is advantageous to the player who can acquire a large number of medals.

According to the configuration of the means 12, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted in the pachislot machine.

Means 13: In any one of the gaming machines from Means 1 to Means 10.
It is characterized by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.
Here, the "game machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine" is an operation means for starting after a plurality of (for example, 5) game balls are used as one unit of input medium and the input medium is charged. A symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed according to the operation of (for example, an operation lever), and then the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped according to an operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operation means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time. Then, when the variable display of each symbol string is stopped, the displayed single symbol is a specific symbol, the combination of the symbols displayed in each symbol string is a specific combination, and so on. When the conditions are met, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied conditions, or a special advantageous state is generated which is advantageous to the player who can acquire a large number of medals.

According to the configuration of the means 13, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted in a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. .. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the lock member in the outer frame. FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the dish unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for each main member and looked at from the top. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. It is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit and looked at from the bottom. It is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the touch unit and looked at from the bottom. It is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the button unit and looked at from the bottom. It is a top view of the dish unit. FIG. 3 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. 39. FIG. 3 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the effect operation unit in the CC cross section in FIG. 39. (A) is a front view of the lower right effect unit of the door of the plate unit, and (b) is a right side view of the lower right effect unit of the door. (A) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 42 (b) is a sectional view taken along line DD of the lower right door effect unit of FIG. 42 (b). It is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door production unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the lower right door production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotating body internal unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body of the door lower right effect unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body facing backward. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front with the upper plate ball removing unit of the plate unit attached to the plate unit base, and (b) is a perspective view from the back with the upper plate ball removing unit attached to the plate unit base. It is a seen perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper plate ball pulling unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper plate ball pulling unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the lower plate ball removing unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower plate ball removing unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the payout device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the payout blade in a payout device. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view which cut the front component and the front unit of a game board at the substantially center of the game area in the front-rear direction. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the bottom of the side unit and the top of the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the bottom of the side unit and the top of the side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the right-hand flow path in the center accessory by the cross section. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line FF in (a). It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back box and the like seen from the front of the game board, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower and rear movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back and lower rear movable effect unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear-back movable production unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back-bottom rear movable production unit disassembled for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit of the back-bottom rear movable effect unit and looked at from the front together with the back-bottom rear first decorative body and the back bottom rear second decorative body. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and looked at from the back together with the 1st decorative body after the back bottom and the 2nd decorative body after the back bottom. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the movable production unit after the back side from the front. (A) is a front view of the back-bottom-post-movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a back-back by rotating the back-bottom rear first decorative body and the back-lower rear second decorative body together from the normal state. It is a front view of the lower rear second decorative body with the second decorative surface facing the front, and (c) is the front view of the lower rear first decorative body and the lower rear second decorative body in the state of (b). It is a front view of the state moved to the moving end on the left side of the view. In (d), in the state of FIG. 104 (c), the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative body after the back bottom are rotated together so that the first decorative surface of the first decorative body after the back bottom faces the front. It is a front view of the state, (e) is the state of (d), the first decorative body after the back bottom is rotated to open the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative body after the back bottom, and after the back bottom. It is a front view of the state where the second decorative surface of the first decorative body and the second decorative surface of the second decorative body after the lower back are facing the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper left movable production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper left movable production unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body in the back upper left movable effect unit. It is a front view which shows in the state which it moved to the position of the right end, (c) is the front view which shows in the state which developed the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body from the state of (b). Is. (A) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing the back left movable decorative body in the back left movable effect unit in a protruding state. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up and middle movable production unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is a disassembled back-up and middle movable production unit for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative body unit viewed from the front by disassembling the upper and middle decorative body units. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative body unit viewed from behind by disassembling the upper middle decorative unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive configuration of the back-up middle decoration unit from the front, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in (a). (A) is a front view of the back-up middle decoration unit in a normal state, and (b) shows a pair of back-up middle decoration units with the back-up middle first decoration unit half open outward. It is a front view, and (c) is a front view which shows the pair of back-up middle decoration unit of the back-up middle decoration unit in a state of being completely opened to the outside. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable production unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable production unit as viewed from behind. is there. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle rotation unit of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is the back-up middle rotation unit of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled from the back. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the movable production unit in the back-up middle from the front roughly. (A) is a front view of the back-up middle movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing the back-up middle decorative body unit lowered in the back-up middle movable effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the front lower back movable effect unit as seen from the front by disassembling other than the lower back front decorative body unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the front lower back movable production unit as seen from behind by disassembling the unit other than the lower back front decorative body unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the front lower back decorative body unit of the lower back front movable production unit viewed from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view of the back bottom front decorative body unit of the back bottom front movable production unit as viewed from behind by disassembling it. It is a front view which shows outline of the elevating mechanism in the back lower front movable production unit. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing the state of the decorative body unit elevating mechanism when the back lower front decorative body unit is raised, and (b) is an enlarged view of the unit elevating pin portion in (a). It is explanatory drawing, (c) is an explanatory view which expands (b) further and shows the relationship between the unit elevating pin and the elevating slit. (A) is a front view showing the lower back front movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (a), and (c). ) Is a front view showing a state in which the back lower front first decorative body of the back lower front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (b). In the back lower rear movable production unit of the back unit, the first decorative body after lower back and the second decorative body after lower back are rotated together in the normal position to show the second decorative surface facing the front. It is a front view. Movable after the back of the back unit The first decorative body after the back of the unit and the second decorative body after the back are closed, and the first decorative surface of the first decorative body after the back is facing the front. A state in which the first decorative body on the back upper left and the second decorative body on the back upper left of the back upper left movable production unit are slid and moved to approximately the center in the left and right direction in the game area. It is a front view of the game board shown by. From the state shown in FIG. 133, the rear lower rear movable production unit is hinged and opened to open the second decorative surface of each of the lower back first decorative body and the lower rear second decorative body. At the same time, rotate the hinge rotation of the back top left second decorative member of the back top left movable production unit to open it, and open the back top left first decoration body fixed decoration member and the back top left second decoration body second decoration member. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state facing the front. From the state shown in FIG. 133, the rear lower rear movable production unit is hinged and opened to open the second decorative surface of each of the lower back first decorative body and the lower rear second decorative body. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state facing. It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back left movable decorative body of the back unit is slid to the appearance position at the right end of the front view. In the back unit, the back upper middle decorative body unit is moved to the position of the descending end of the back upper middle movable production unit, and the back upper middle decorative body unit is extended diagonally downward to the left in the front view in the counterclockwise direction in the front view. It is a front view of the game board shown in the rotated state. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 137 and slid to a position in a half-opened intermediate open state. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 138 and slid to a position in a fully open state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back lower front movable production unit back lower front decorative body unit of the back unit is positioned at the rising end. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the front lower back first decorative body is hinge-rotated from the state of FIG. 140, and is raised above the lower back lower front second decorative body. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating the front and rear, and a game attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the game ball attached to the lower right part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the door frame 5 into the game area, and a plate unit 200 that receives a game ball that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower plate 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and for sending the game ball of the upper plate 201 to the ball launcher 680, and a door frame base unit 100. It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from island facilities (not shown in a box shape) and a game ball attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game ball, which is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guide unit 820, is instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 142) housed in the payout control board box 950. Based on this, the payout device 830 and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. From the upper full tank path unit 850 that discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the situation, and from the normal discharge port of the upper full tank path unit 850 that is attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The released game ball is guided forward and guided from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. The normal taxiway and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port are guided forward and the door frame 3 is guided from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway for guiding to the full tank receiver 530.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass inside which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are housed therein. It includes a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part on the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 to control the game of the pachinko machine 1. A table unit having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning openings mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving a game ball driven into the game area 5a (not shown). ), And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 on the upper side of the board box 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning openings. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front by disassembling the outer frame. 15A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. It is provided with a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front left end side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the like. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upper portion on the left end side of the front view and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the center of the left and right, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700, which will be described later, is locked. , Prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness are the same as the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 recessed from the front surfaces of both left and right ends to the rear. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch portion 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B described later of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that the game ball can pass through. A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a standing wall portion 54 protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 and the front surface upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface of the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state of being assembled on the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A unit 57 and a unit 57 are provided. The lower surface of the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to increase the strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 61 having a quadrangular outer shape and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 15B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 17).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a is formed so as to accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which will be described later, of the hinge member 620 on the main body frame side.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is rearward from the center in the front-rear direction. A flat rising portion 72 that rises, a hinge pin 73 under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 up and down so that only one game ball can pass through. It is provided with a horizontal discharge hole 74. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the ball and the ball gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32 and 42. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32, 42 by screws screwed from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 from the protruding portions 32 and 42. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. ..

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 16 and 17 show the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. 16 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 16 (b) is an outside view. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state in which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 63 are obliquely opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal shaft support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock member 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is a component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the center of rotation of the lock member 66). The front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right side, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front protruding portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and the lock member 66 is locked. Even if the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the bearing groove 63 is placed in the bearing groove 63 from the open side on the main body frame. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is accommodated in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It becomes a held (locked) state in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

Further, since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 18 (b). When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) on the outer frame side, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54. Therefore, there is a risk that it will be sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a right discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. And, since the left discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 from being used for fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 25. FIG. 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the door frame. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has a quadrangular outer shape and a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the front right lower part of the door frame base unit 100. It includes a handle unit 500 that can be attached through the plate unit 200.

Further, the door frame 3 is attached to the foul cover unit 520 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the ball feed unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. It includes a glass unit 560 that closes the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and having through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear. A tubular handle mounting member 120 mounted in the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 for mounting the handle unit 500, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And, the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. It is provided with an upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass unit mounting member 160 that is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and for detachably mounting the glass unit 560. There is.

The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202, which are arranged vertically and bulge forward to store the game balls, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. A plate-shaped plate unit base 210 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is attached to the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and can display an image. On the right side of the effect operation unit 220 having the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 that can be operated by the player, the plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and the front view upper plate 201. A lower right door effect unit 270 having a lower right rotating body 270A of the door that is arranged and rotates according to the game state, a transparent effect unit cover 300 that covers the lower right effect unit 270 of the door from the front side, and an upper plate. An upper plate ball removing unit 310 for pulling out the game ball stored in 201 to the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball removing unit 320 for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 202 downward, and a game hall. A ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and attached to the upper part of the plate unit base 210. It mainly includes an upper plate top decorative member 340 that can be decorated by luminescence.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 and a unit base, which are partially translucent and are attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. A top decorative member 370 that is mounted in the center of the left and right on the front of the 360 and has translucency that bulges forward, and a top speaker that is mounted inside the top decorative member 370 and outputs high-pitched sound ( (Not shown) and a decorative substrate 380 on the door frame, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and has a plurality of LEDs attached to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat plate-shaped unit base 410 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 and a unit. A translucent left side decorative member 420 that is attached to the front surface of the base 410 and whose upper end extends to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420. The left speaker unit 430, which is mounted at the upper left corner of 3 and has a left speaker (not shown), and the door frame, which is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 410 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. The left decorative substrate 440 and the like are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat plate-shaped unit base 460 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the right outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 and a unit. A translucent right side decorative member 470 that is attached to the front side of the base 460 and whose upper end extends to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame in front of the right side decorative member 470. A right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) mounted at a position in the upper right corner of 3 and a plurality of LEDs mounted between the unit base 460 and the right side decorative member 470 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. It is equipped with a door frame right decorative board (not shown) to which the door frame is attached.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by the player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and rotatably supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And have. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is mounted on the handle operation sensor 507 (see FIG. 142), which is mounted inside the handle body 502 and detects the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and the handle body 502. It includes a stop button that can be operated by the cage player, and a contact detection sensor 509 (see FIG. 142) that is mounted inside the handle body 502 and detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504.

As shown in FIGS. 24, 25, 54 to 56, etc., the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is a shallow box-shaped unit body attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and the front side is open. It mainly includes a 522 and a flat plate-shaped lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and a penetrating ball passage that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 which is open to the rear on the right side of the front view of the penetrating ball passage 526 and can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4, and the full tank. A foul that receives a game ball (foul ball) that opens upward on the right side of the front view of the ball receiving port 528 and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. The ball receiving port 530 and the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit 200 while releasing the game balls received in the full tank receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530, which are opened forward in the lower right corner of the front view. It is provided with a ball outlet 532 that communicates with 210c.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to a box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends to the left and right and has an open rear side, and a rear side of the unit main body 542. A box-shaped unit cover 544 with an open front side that can be detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520, and an upper plate of the plate unit 200 that opens toward the front. A ball advance entrance 546 in which the game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball release port 548 in which the game ball that has entered the ball advance entrance 546 can be released and is open rearward, and a ball advance entrance. It is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered the 546, and is provided with a ball discharge port 550 that opens forward at the lower side of the ball advance entrance 546. Further, although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid 551 (see FIG. 142) for releasing the game balls entering from the ball advance entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a ball entry. It is provided with a switching mechanism for switching the game ball entering from the mouth 546 to either the ball discharge port 548 side or the ball discharge port 550 side.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and to both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562. It includes a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

[3-1. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 26 to 41. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 30A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit disassembled and viewed from below.

Further, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit disassembled and viewed from below. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit disassembled and viewed from below. 39 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. 39, and FIG. 41 is an effect operation in the CC cross section in FIG. 39. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of a unit enlarged.

Further, FIG. 42A is a front view of the lower right door effect unit of the dish unit, FIG. 42B is a right side view of the lower right door effect unit, and FIG. 43A is a lower right door effect unit. It is a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower right door production unit seen from the back. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of the lower right door effect unit of FIG. 42 (b). FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 49A is a front view of the lower right door rotating body of the door lower right effect unit facing forward, and FIG. 49B is a front view of the lower right door rotating body facing backward.

Further, FIG. 50 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front with the upper plate ball removing unit of the plate unit attached to the plate unit base, and FIG. 50 (b) shows the upper plate ball removing unit attached to the plate unit base. It is a perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the upper plate ball removing unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper plate ball removing unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 53A is a perspective view of the lower plate ball removing unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 53B is an exploded perspective view of the lower plate ball removing unit as viewed from the front.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 that stores a game ball that is discharged from the payout device 830 and is to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is arranged below the upper plate 201 and is supplied from the upper plate 201. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls. Further, the plate unit 200 is attached to the flat plate-shaped plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 210, and the left side from the center of the left and right bulges forward greatly, and the upper plate 201 The upper plate main body 212 forming the lower plate 202, and the lower plate main body 214 which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges forward greatly to form the lower plate 202. ..

Further, the plate unit 200 covers the effect operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the plate unit base 210, the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the front side and the lower side of the effect operation unit. The plate unit cover 260 attached to the front of the plate unit base 210, the lower right door effect unit 270 located on the right side of the effect operation unit 220 and attached to the right front side of the plate unit base 210, and the lower right effect unit of the door. A game ball that covers the front side of the 270 and is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210 and is attached so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate main body 212. Upper plate ball removing unit 310 for removing the ball to the lower plate 202, and a lower plate ball removing unit for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward, which are attached to the lower side of the lower plate main body 214. It is equipped with 320.

Further, the plate unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220, and is a ball rental operation unit 330 for operating a ball rental machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, and a plate. The upper plate top decorative member 340, which is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and can be decorated by light emission, and the upper plate top decorative member 340, which is attached to the front left side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the plate unit cover 260, can irradiate light forward. It is attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the effect unit cover 300 and under the effect unit 270 on the lower right side of the door, and the plate unit left decorative board 345 equipped with a plurality of LEDs. The dish unit right decorative board 346 equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and the upper dish front decorative board 233, the upper dish rear decorative board 235, and the upper dish which are attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 and will be described later. Liquid crystal board 241, vibration device 242, touch panel 246, effect button decorative board 251, effect button pressing sensor 258, lower right relay board 281 of the door, dish unit left decorative board 345, and dish unit right decorative board 346 and game board 5. A dish unit relay board 347 that relays a connection with a peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) is provided.

[3-1a. Dish unit base]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the plate unit base 210 of the plate unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit base 210 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and penetrates back and forth under the upper plate ball supply port 210a and the upper plate ball supply port 210a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker slit 210b consisting of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, a lower plate ball supply port 210c penetrating the front and rear at the lower center of the left and right in the front view and extending in a tubular shape to the rear, and a lower plate. The ball supply port 210c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 210d which penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the front view and extends vertically and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 210 has a through hole 210e having a square inner circumference penetrating back and forth on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 210d in the front view, and a receiver protruding forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the escape port 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating front and back at the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. The handle insertion port 210h, the cylinder insertion port 210i that penetrates back and forth near the right corner of the front view and the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the right side of the front view of the tubular lower plate ball supply port 210c. A notch 210j, which is notched from the rear end to the front on the side surface of the above, is provided.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape that bulges forward on the left side of the center on the left and right sides of the front view, and is open upward and rearward. ing. The upper plate main body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is open only to the left and rearward on the right end side of the front view and through which game balls can circulate. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowered as a whole. More specifically, with the upper plate main body 212 attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is a game ball from the lower position of the upper plate ball supply port 210a to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It is inclined so that it becomes slightly lower than the outer diameter of. As a result, the game ball discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate main body 212, and the received game ball can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feeding port 210d.

Further, the upper plate main body 212 includes a metal ground fitting 212b extending from the center of the left and right to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground fitting 212b is electrically grounded, and the static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed by contact with the game ball.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower plate main body 214 of the plate unit 200 has a plan view trapezoidal shape in which the rear end side is longer than the front end side, and is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 214 is provided with a ball extraction hole 214a that penetrates vertically through the bottom surface and can be closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the ball extraction hole 214a. doing. The lower plate main body 214 can receive and store the game balls discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and the game balls can be moved downward from the plate unit 200 from the ball extraction hole 214a. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the mounting base unit 220A attached to the plate unit base 210 and the upper plate main body 212 at the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and the mounting base unit 220A. Touch unit 220B, button unit 220C mounted on the mounting base unit 220A on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the mounting base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end of the mounting base unit 220A in front view are provided.

The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction over the entire circumference. The damper 222 in this embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can alleviate the impact when the touch unit 220B is hit and reduce the load (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 to the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the mounting base unit 220A of the effect operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and has a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 whose upper side is open, and on the upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 whose rear end is attached to the front end of the upper plate main body 212 and whose upper end is open so that the touch unit 200B can be accommodated from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231. The front lens member 232, the upper plate front decorative substrate 233 arranged between the upper plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and the unit cover covering the front side of the upper plate front lens member 232. It is provided with a translucent upper plate front decorative member 234 attached to the 224.

Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and is provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward, and the upper side of the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 and the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235. From the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235, which is sandwiched between the upper plate rear decorative member 236 having a translucency and attached to the unit cover 224, and the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decorative member 236. A linear light emitting lens member 237 that can guide the light of the above plate and emit light linearly at the upper end, a tubular button mounting member 238 that is attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side of the front view of the upper plate rear decorative member 236, and a button mounting member. It is equipped with an upper plate ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached up and down by 238.

The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined from the substantially center of the front and rear to the front side so as to be lowered toward the front, and the mounting side receiving portion 230a that penetrates the mounting side receiving portion 230a and is separated to the left and right. It is provided with one through-hole 230b and a tubular tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the peripheral edge of the through-hole 230b. The inner circumference of the through port 230b is formed in a quadrangular shape. The tubular receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal tubular shape so as to narrow toward the downward direction (see FIG. 41). More specifically, in the tubular receiving portion 230c, the inner peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and the inner peripheral wall on the rear side is downward with respect to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. It slopes and extends forward as it goes toward. Further, the tubular receiving portion 230c extends with the inner peripheral walls on both the left and right sides inclined so that the lower ends (tips) of the tubular receiving portion 230c are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

The unit case 231 is open upward and is separated from each other in the front-rear direction from the front left and right ends of the accommodating recess 231a capable of accommodating the touch unit 220B and the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a. The lateral support pin 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c that are separated from each other to the left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a and project upward in a columnar shape, and the accommodation recess 231a from the left and right centers on the front and rear ends of the bottom surface It is provided with a central support protrusion 231d projecting upward and two receiving portions 231e projecting in a pyramidal shape so as to narrow from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a downward to the left and right. ..

Further, the unit case 231 is arranged around the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface and the insertion hole 231f which penetrates vertically and vertically on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a and through which the lower portion of the button unit 220C is inserted. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C and a linear light emitting portion 237b of a linear light emitting lens member 237 extending left and right on the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the accommodating recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are arranged. It is provided with a notch portion 231h.

The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 is formed in a plan view shape in which a quadrangle extending to the left and right and a trapezoid protruding outward from both the left and right sides of the quadrangle are combined. Further, in the accommodating recess 231a, the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is formed lower downward with respect to the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion on both the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a is formed to be slightly lower than the height (length in the axial direction) of the damper 222.

The four lateral support pins 231b project upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodating recess 231a and are formed so as to be insertable into the tubular damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 40). The distance from the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire lateral support pin 231b is formed longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231c can be inserted into the tubular damper 222, and are formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the accommodation recess 231a. The abutment portion 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a quadrangular outer circumference. The two receiving portions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The outer peripheral wall on the front side of the abutment portion 231e extends substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a, and the outer peripheral wall on the rear side is inclined forward as it goes downward with respect to the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a. And extend. Further, the abutment portion 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) are slightly close to each other with respect to the perpendicularity of the surface of the accommodating recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the impact receiving portion 231e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the lower end of the abutment portion 231e is inserted into the through port 230a of the mounting base 230, and a slight gap is formed between the abutment portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c.

The front surface of the upper plate front decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for luminescent decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and a plurality of peripheral LED 235b for luminescent decoration of the linear light emitting lens member 237. ..

The linear light emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right than the upper plate rear decorative member 236, and has a light receiving portion 237a and a light receiving portion 237a arranged above the plurality of peripheral edge LEDs 235b of the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped linear light emitting portion 237b which is continuously fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the linear light emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231 so that the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the accommodating recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, and guides the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b to guide the light received by the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be made to emit light (linearly).

The upper plate ball removing button 239 is slidably attached up and down by the button attachment member 238, and includes an extension piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge (pull out) the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202. )be able to.

The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, an outer peripheral surface of two abutment portions 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and a mounting base 230 into which the lower end of the abutment portion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the tubular receiving portion and the inner peripheral surface. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the recess 231a bends downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving portion 231e abuts on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular receiving portion 230c, so that the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

Further, the abutment portion 231e of the unit case 231 and the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner circumference inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the impact receiving portion 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a provided with the tubular receiving portion 230c. To do. As a result, the force from the impact portion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it is possible to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. ..

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 having an open upper portion, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 mounted in the lower case 240 from above, and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241. A pair of vibrating devices 242 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240, a pair of vibrating devices 242, and an upper side of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are covered and attached to the lower case 240 and above. A shallow box-shaped base member 243 with an open surface, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 inserted into the base member 243 from above and controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 to display an image, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-shaped ground fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate that covers the outer periphery, a transparent touch panel 246 that covers the upper surface of the ground fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and a lower case that covers the outer circumference of the touch panel 246 from above and passes through a base member 243. It includes a frame-shaped upper cover 247 that can be attached to the 240.

Further, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on its rear end surface in a state where the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247 are assembled, and also lower. It is provided with a waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 that extends over substantially the entire length of the rear end surface of the case 240 or the like and is attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the accommodating recess 213a of the unit case 231, and the lower case 240 is formed so as to be accommodating in the accommodating recess 213a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-shaped protruding portion 240b protruding from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a in a trapezoidal shape, and each protruding portion 240b having an outer diameter of a damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c, which have the same inner shape as the above and are partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are formed apart from each other in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d and the vibration device mounting portion 240e arranged near the board mounting portion 240a between the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the protruding portion 240b and to which the vibration device 242 is mounted are provided.

The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided at substantially the center of the upper and lower sides of the damper mounting recess 240c over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a. A screw hole 243c that penetrates vertically at the tip of the extension portion 243b at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 and has a large-diameter counterbore on the upper side, and a screw hole 243c formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. It is provided with a C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 40) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 can be passed through the tip side of the lateral support pin 231b of the unit case 231 than the tapered portion 231i, and the base end side (lower side) of the tapered portion 231i. It is formed to a size that cannot be passed through.

The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is strong against impact and is hard to break, a transparent capacitance type sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the tempered glass and the outer periphery of the sensor sheet. ing.

The touch unit 220B can mount the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the open side of the C-shape into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c is inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. As a result, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. When the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protrude.

Further, in the touch unit 220B, the vibration drive motor 242a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibrating devices 242 can generate vibrations independently of each other.

Further, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from above through the touch panel 246. Then, by displaying an image such as a button on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and touching the touch panel 246 as if the player operates the button of the image, the button of the image can be operated.

Further, since the touch unit 220B has a preventive water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid does not enter the touch unit 220B. It can be prevented and the touch unit 220B can be prevented from being damaged by the infiltration of liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 is a cylindrical unit body 250 mounted on the button unit mounting portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the mounting base unit 220A, and a bottom of the unit body 250. It includes an effect button decorative board 251 arranged on the side and provided with an LED on the upper surface, and a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the effect button decorative board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

Further, the button unit 220C is arranged between the tubular button base 253, which is slidably inserted into the unit body 250 from above and up and down, and the button base 253 and the unit body 250, and the button base 253 is attached upward. A spring member 254 that urges, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and can guide the light from the LED of the effect button decorative substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute particles arranged above the light guide member 255. A sheet-shaped diffuser lens member 256 equipped with various prisms, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffuser lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and an effect button decorative substrate 251 attached to the upper surface. It is equipped with an effect button pressing sensor 258 that detects the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

The unit body 250 includes three mounting pieces 250a attached to the button unit mounting portion 231g extending outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface, and a flange-shaped shelf portion 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. A pair of through-holes 250c that penetrate the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface are provided.

The button base 253 has a tubular lower cylinder portion 253a inserted into the inner circumference of the shelf portion 250b, a conical upper cylinder portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower cylinder portion 253a, and an upper portion. A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the tubular portion 253b so that the lower end can penetrate the through port 250c of the unit body 250 and protrudes outward from the lower end and can engage (contact) with the lower surface of the unit body 250. The pair of engaging claws 253c having the above and the upper cylinder 253b project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylinder portion 253b, which is shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end, and the lower end can come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250. A plurality of flat plate-shaped contact pieces 253d and a detection piece 253e extending outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cylinder portion 253a and the upper cylinder portion 253b in a flat plate shape and detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 are provided. ing.

As shown in the figure, the spring member 254 is a coil spring. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by a plurality of contact pieces 253d in the button base 253.

The light guide member 255 extends from the lower surface of the disk-shaped main body portion 255a fitted to the upper portion of the upper cylinder portion 253b of the button base 253 and the lower surface of the main body portion 255a to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253. It is provided with a plurality of columnar light guide portions 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decorative substrate 251 and can guide the light from the LEDs and emit the light from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

In this button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusion lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. In these button bases 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 projects upward from the upper end of the unit body 250 due to the urging force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 is the unit body. By engaging with the lower surface of the 250, further ascent is restricted, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 and is moved up. The pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. , The upper plate effect button 257 and the like are located at the descending end.

Further, the button unit 220C can make the upper plate effect button 257 emit light by emitting the LED of the effect button decoration board 251. The LED of the effect button decoration board 251 is a full-color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be light-emitting and decorated in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of the production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 40, the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment has the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B from the lower surface of the lower case 240 in the assembled state. A gap is formed between the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four lateral support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surface of the washer of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and are upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the lateral support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly larger than the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a on the lateral support pin 231b side. It protrudes upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower surface are below. A gap is also formed between the case 240 and the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the lateral support pins 231b on both the left and right sides.

Further, the effect operation unit 220 is narrowed downward in the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is mounted from above in the pyramidal tubular receiving portion 230c that is narrowed downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the round pyramid-shaped receiving portion 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e. As a result, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is mounted on the mounting base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the central side of the accommodating recess 231a) floating in the air.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30 and the like, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear along the rear side near the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B. It is exposed in a band shape). The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about ⅔ of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. A rear decorative member 236 for the upper plate is arranged on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, the upper plate ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the upper plate rear decorative member 236. Further, the button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B.

The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 to entertain the player.

By displaying an image imitating an operation button as an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and making it possible to accept touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246, the player can receive the image of the image. The operation buttons can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 during the effect using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation buttons, and various images can be displayed.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by a plurality of dampers 222 in a floating state from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B can be operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. It can be vibrated. By vibrating the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) by the vibrating device 242 during the production using the touch panel 246, the vibration by the vibrating device 242 is applied to the fingers and hands of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. By transmitting it, it is possible to surprise the player as if he / she is operating the operation button of the image even though he / she is operating the operation button of the image. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player is made to press the upper plate effect button 257 according to the game state, and the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, the operation buttons of the image on the touch panel 246 are disliked to lack an operation feeling compared to the actual operation buttons because they only touch the touch panel 246, but the upper plate effect button 257 actually presses the operation. Therefore, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 does not give a sense of discomfort, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 can be enjoyed comfortably, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. ..

Since this effect operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion of the plate unit 200 that bulges forward and is provided with the upper plate 201, the game is played even when the effect is not performed using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a risk that a person will hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a floating state from the lower unit case 231, the elasticity of the damper 222 even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above. The impact can be absorbed to some extent by the force. More specifically, when an impact (load) acts from above, such as when the touch unit 220B is hit, it is transmitted to the damper 222 into which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered due to the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The damper 222 is compressed downward. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by the impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces of the accommodation recesses 231a of the unit case 231 on the left and right sides and the upper surface of the central support projection 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B acts directly from the touch unit 220B to the unit case 231 without the intervention of the plurality of dampers 222.

Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent so that the center thereof moves downward due to the load from the central support projection 231d. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a. As the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a bends, a pair of abutment portions 231e protruding downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a descend. Then, when the abutting portion 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the abutting portion 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the abutting portion 231e from the touch unit 220B. The impact will be transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

Since the outer peripheral wall of the abutting portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramidal shape that narrows downward, from the abutting portion 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. In this way, by the time the impact acting on the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230, the structure for absorbing the impact is arranged in multiple layers, so that the impact acting on the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231 and the mounting base 230 can be made less likely to be damaged by the impact.

Further, the effect operation unit 220 is a linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can be made to emit light linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B and the touch effect using the touch panel 246 are enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, depending on the game state, the decorative LED 235a of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 illuminates and decorates the upper plate rear decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (rear side of the linear light emitting portion 237b). be able to. By luminescent decoration of the upper plate rear decorative member 236, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, as in the case of the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the production presented by the production operation unit 220 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to the upper plate lower covering portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. It is arranged at a position higher than the upper surface of the touch unit 220B, and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. As a result, even if the water (water droplets) that has condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 or the game ball due to contact with the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (above the upper plate lower covering portion 262). , It is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the touch unit 220B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for luminescent decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. It is possible to prevent defects such as short circuit and corrosion in the decorative substrate 235 after the upper plate without being exposed to the water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201.

[3-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends to the left and right, and the center of the left and right bulges forward to form a shell shape that is open to the rear. .. The plate unit cover 260 has a lower plate opening 261 which is opened forward at substantially the center of the left and right and whose rear end is closed by the plate unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261. The lower plate covering portion 262 that covers the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the effect operation unit 220, and the bass of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 that is arranged on the left side of the front view of the lower plate opening 261. The speaker grill 263 that transmits the sound from the speaker, the plate unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged above the speaker grill 263 and is light-emittingly decorated by the plate unit left decorative substrate 345, and the lower plate opening 261 are arranged on the right side of the front view. A handle opening 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes, a bottom plate portion 266 forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 260 and covering the lower side of the lower plate body 214, and a bottom plate at the center of the left and right sides. It includes a bottom plate opening 267 that penetrates the portion 266 up and down and is closed by the lower plate ball removing unit 320.

The bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261 is closed by the lower plate main body 214. The speaker grill 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal having a plurality of holes in the metal plate.

The surface of the dish unit cover 260 on the left side when viewed from the front is formed to have a smooth feel, whereas the surface on the right side is formed to have a rugged feel. Further, the right side of the front view has substantially overall translucency.

The plate unit cover 260 is formed at a distance that can be grasped with one hand between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. As a result, when the player touch-operates the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the upper plate lower covering portion 262. The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the front-rear distance from the front end of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 to the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm, respectively. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined by about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. As a result, the player can grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 by the player's hand.

[3-1f. Door lower right production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 42 to 49, the lower right effect unit 270 of the door of the plate unit 200 is arranged on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, and rotates according to the gaming state. It is equipped with a spherical door lower right rotating body 270A that is luminescent and decorated. The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 which is attached so as to close the escape port 210 g at the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the lower right rotating body 270A of the door, and the unit base 271. The lower right door drive motor 272, the drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower right door drive motor 272, the driven gear 274 meshed with the drive gear 273 and attached to the lower right door rotating body 270A, and the driven gear 274. It includes a shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

Further, the lower right door effect unit 270 is mounted on the opposite side of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door from the driven gear 274, and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the bearing member 276 on the rotating body side and the lower right door. The base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the side of the rotating body 270A opposite to the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 that can detect the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side of the front view of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door, and a decorative member 279 attached to the rear side of the unit base 271 and on the front side. A lower right base decorative board 280 equipped with multiple LEDs, a lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, a rotation detection sensor 278, a lower right base decorative board 280 of the door, and a door described later. It is provided with a lower right relay board 281 for a door that relays the connection between the lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and the peripheral control board 1510.

The lower right rotating body 270A of the door constitutes an outer shell and is arranged between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which has a hemispherical shell shape, and the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. It includes a rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular notches 285a and 286a about the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a hemispherical shell-like surface having a metallic luster and a band decoration 285b extending in a circumferential direction, and a heart shape arranged in the center of the band decoration 285b. It has a heart decoration of 285c and. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in a band shape in the circumferential direction on a translucent hemispherical shell-like surface. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are formed so as to be connected to each other.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the rotating body internal unit 290 has a disk-shaped lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 having a plurality of LEDs on both sides and a center of the lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291. The columnar first fixed shaft member 292, which is attached to the lower right of the door and extends perpendicular to the surface of the rotating body decorative substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292. Cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 of the door, extends perpendicular to the surface of the lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 of the door, and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293 of the above is provided. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the lower right relay board 281 of the door and the lower right rotating body decorative board 291 of the door is inserted inside the second fixed shaft member 293.

Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is arranged on both sides of the rotating body decorative substrate 291 at the lower right of the door, and is a flat plate and an annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. The first reflector 295, which is attached to the reflector base 294 and has an annular shape and opens outward in the axial direction, and the first reflector 295, which is attached to the reflector base 294 through the ring of the first reflector 295, has a hexagonal shape in the center. It is provided with a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface thereof, and can reflect light from the lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 of the door. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of vertically extending flat plate-shaped ribs.

The rotating body internal unit 290 includes a rotating body decorative substrate 291 at the lower right of the door, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, and a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other so that they can rotate relative to each other.

The unit base 271 has an annular ring portion 271a arranged behind the lower right rotating body 270A of the door and a flat plate shape forward from a portion diagonally upper right in front view with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer circumference of the ring portion 271a. 271b of the first protruding piece 271b protruding forward, 271c of the second protruding piece 271c protruding forward in a flat plate shape from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first protruding piece 271b, and 271c of the second protruding piece. It is provided with a bearing groove 271d, which is recessed in a U shape from the front end to the rear and into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted.

The lower right door drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b with the rotation shaft penetrating. The driven gear 274 is formed to have a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a tubular shaft portion 275b protruding from the mounting portion 275a in a tubular shape. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer circumference of the tubular shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner circumference of the tubular shaft portion 275b.

The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are symmetrically attached to the second protruding piece 271c with the rotation axis of the lower right door rotating body 270A interposed therebetween. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right door rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 49 (a)) and a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c faces backward (FIG. 49 (b)). (See) and can be detected respectively.

The lower right door effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the lower right door rotating body 270A by the lower right door drive motor 272 according to the gaming state, and stops the heart decoration 285c so as to face forward. Depending on whether or not it is present, it is possible to suggest the arrival of an opportunity to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the door lower right effect unit 270, since the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A is attached so as not to rotate, the door right during the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A. When the lower rotating body decorative substrate 291 (LED) is made to emit light, the position of the light emitted from the lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 of the door moves as the lower right rotating body 270A of the door rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the first reflector 295 and the second Since the direction of the light reflected and induced by the two reflectors 296 changes, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door is light-emitting decoration as if the light is blinking without blinking the LED of the lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 of the door. The lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be rainbow-colored and decorated by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, and the player can be entertained.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the effect unit cover 300 of the plate unit 200 includes a hemispherical and transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical door lower right rotating body 270A in the door lower right effect unit 270. , The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer circumference of the rotating body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the front view of the dish unit cover 260, and the lower right side of the rotating body cover portion 301 penetrating the locking unit 700 in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

The effect unit cover 300 has a container-like shape with an open rear portion as a whole and has translucency. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is light-emittingly decorated by the lower right door decorative substrate 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is the dish unit right decorative substrate 346. Illuminated by.

[3-1h. Upper plate ball removal unit]
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the upper plate ball removing unit 310 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the plate unit base 210 from the front side and rearward. The cover 311 has an open vertical box shape and has an insertion port 311a through which the extension piece 239a of the upper plate ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and the through hole 210e of the plate unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 mounted at a position at the upper left of the front view, a pressure transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and rotated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member. It includes a first spring member 314 that urges the 313 in the direction in which the countersunk ball removing button 239 rises.

Further, the upper plate ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 210 so as to close the upper plate ball feed port 210d of the plate unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. The upper plate ball pulling slider 316, which is arranged between the 315 and the dish unit base 210 and is attached so as to be able to move up and down by the rear base member 315, and the press transmission member 313 is in contact with the upper plate ball pulling slider 316, and the upper dish ball pulling. It includes a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

The front base member 312 has a flat plate-shaped base portion 312a extending parallel to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and attached to the cover 311 and a pair of extending flat plates extending forward from both the left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protrusion 312b, the shaft support 312c recessed rearward from the front end of the extension piece 312b, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 provided near the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are locked. It is equipped with a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

The press transmission member 313 has a horizontally long columnar shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rear extension extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. The upper extension piece 313c that extends upward from the vicinity of the left end of the front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b in a flat plate shape, and the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper plate ball removal button 239 can come into contact with the extension piece 313c. The lower extension piece 313d extending downward from the right end of the front view on the lower surface of the rear extension piece 313b and the first spring protruding downward from the lower side near the left end of the front view of the shaft portion 313a. It includes a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape extending downward toward the rear, and the lower end thereof can be brought into contact with the upper plate ball removing slider 316.

The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the plate unit base 210, and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the plate unit base 210 and a front surface of the base portion 315a separated from each other to the left and right. A slider support portion 315b that slidably supports both the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and an opening forward at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper plate ball feed port 210d of the plate unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. It is provided with an upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to flow.

Further, the rear base member 315 extends downward continuously from the upper inlet 315c on the rear side of the base portion 315a and is open rearward, and the lower end is curved rearward with the first taxiway 315d. The L-shaped second taxiway 315e, which extends downward from the lower side of the first taxiway 315d, then extends to the left in front view, the left end is open to the left, and the entire is open to the rear, and the second taxiway. The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that the two sides are surrounded by the flat plate-shaped passage lid 315f that closes the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the taxiway 315e and the L-shaped second taxiway 315e. It includes an opening 315g that penetrates the base portion 315a, and a spring locking portion 315h that projects forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

The L-shaped second taxiway 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined so that the portion extending to the left becomes lower toward the left. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the left end of the second taxiway 315e is inserted into the notch 210j of the tubular lower plate ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second taxiway 315e and the second guideway 315e. The lower plate ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

The upper plate ball removal slider 316 is a flat plate-shaped slider base 316a whose left and right ends are slidably supported by the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate from the left side to the front from the center of the front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends upward to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and allows the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d of the pressing transmission member 313 to come into contact with the upper surface, and a slider below the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c projecting rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-shaped spring engagement unit projecting from the front surface of the slider base 316a and engaging the lower end of the second spring member 317. It is provided with a stop portion 316d.

In the upper plate ball removing unit 310, the upper entrance 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper plate main body 212, which is on the right end side in the front view, in the state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. As a result, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper inlet 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 via the first guide portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

Further, when the upper plate ball removal unit 310 presses the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the urging force of the first spring member 314 by the extension piece 239a of the upper plate ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d rotates around the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the press transmission member 313, the upper plate ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper plate ball removal slider 316 with which the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

By sliding the upper plate ball removal slider 316 downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first taxiway is switched. The 315d side is in a state of communicating with the second taxiway 315e side. As a result, the game ball in the upper plate 201 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first taxiway 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second taxiway 315e. , The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 239 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 316 and the upper plate ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. It can be restored to its original state.

[3-1i. Lower plate ball removal unit]
As shown in FIG. 53 and the like, the lower plate ball removing unit 320 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower plate main body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the plate unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower plate main body 214. A flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removing base 321 having an opening 321a that matches the extraction hole 214a, and a flat plate-shaped slide lid 322 that can slide left and right on the lower plate ball removing base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob portion 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260 to the outside, and a spring urging the slide lid 322 in the direction of closing the opening 321a by the slide lid 322. It includes a member 324 and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 at a position where the opening 321a is open against the urging force of the spring member 324.

The opening 321a of the lower plate ball removing base 321 is formed at a position to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower plate ball removing base 321 to the lower plate main body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower plate ball removing base 321 and the lower plate main body 212. The slide lid 322 is provided with a holding protrusion 322a held by the holding device 325 on the left end side in the front view.

The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower plate ball removing base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that project from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can grip the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding device 325 inserts the holding protrusions 322a between the pair of open holding claws 325a and presses them toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325b closes to hold the holding protrusions 322a and the pair of holdings. The claw 325b is kept closed. When the holding protrusion 322a is moved to the main body 325a side in this state, the pair of holding claws 325a is opened, and the holding of the holding protrusion 322a is released.

In the lower plate ball removing unit 320, when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right side in the front view, the slide lid 322 is provided between the opening 321a and the ball removing hole 214a of the lower plate main body 214. The game ball located in the lower plate 202 does not come out downward from the ball extraction hole 214a, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 202.

From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball extraction hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be pulled out below the plate unit 200 through the ball extraction hole 214a and the opening 321a, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding protrusion 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even if the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game ball inside.

To close the slide lid 322, slightly operate the knob 323 to the left to open the pair of holding claws 325b and release the holding protrusion 322a, and the urging force of the spring member 324 causes the slide lid 322 to slide to the right. Then, the ball extraction hole 214a is closed. By operating the knob portion 323 of the lower plate ball removing unit 320 in this way, it is possible to store the game balls in the lower plate 202 and to remove the game balls stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the ball lending operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200 is a unit case 331 that is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220 near the right end of the front view and has translucency, and a unit. A ball lending button 332 that is exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and can be operated by the player, and a return button 333 that is exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 and can be operated by the player behind the ball lending button 332. It is provided with a display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333.

When the ball lending operation unit 330 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses the ball lending button 332, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit. It can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 201 of 200, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the balance of the lent amount are returned. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down, and the like.

[3-1k. Upper plate top decorative member]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the upper plate top decorative member 340 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the center of the left and right at the upper end of the plate unit base 210 and has a translucent upper plate top lens extending in a strip shape to the left and right. It includes a 340a and an upper plate top decorative substrate 340b which is attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and has a plurality of LEDs attached to the upper surface.

The upper plate top decorative member 340 can make the upper plate top lens 340a emit light in a band shape by emitting the LED of the upper plate top decorative substrate 340b. Since the upper plate top decorative member 340 is arranged on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decorative member is similar to the light emitting decoration of the upper plate rear decorative member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237. By illuminating the 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 is enjoyed and the interest is suppressed from being lowered. be able to.

[3-1l. Characteristic action and effect of the dish unit]
The plate unit 200 of the present embodiment has the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 for storing the game ball on the lower side of the game area 5a, and the game ball in the game area 5a. When displaying an image on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the game state that changes by driving, a band shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper plate rear decorative member 236, the upper plate top decorative member 340, and the like can be made to emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view). It is possible to notice the light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like entering from the outside of the plate, and to attract the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Therefore, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when the effect of an image or the like is presented according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is made to emit light, so that the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 causes the player to emit light. It is possible to make the presentation of the effect noticeable, to entertain the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, the plate unit 200 is arranged outside the game area 5a. Since the arrival of a chance is suggested by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the player is allowed to play in the game area 5a and to produce the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. Both can be bothered. Therefore, by paying attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to enjoy a tight game with a sense of speed, and the player's interest is reduced. By causing the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like to emit light when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of an opportunity on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the player can be transmitted to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It can be noticed, and the player can be entertained by surely recognizing the arrival of an opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a may be anxious, and the player may not be able to concentrate on either of them, which may reduce the interest. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), it is possible to concentrate in the game area 5a until the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, and the game in the game area 5a is enjoyed. At the same time, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, and the game can be sharpened and not bored.

Further, since the plate unit 200 that bulges toward the player under the game area 5a is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is arranged at a position close to the player. Become. As a result, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is easily hidden by the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is difficult to be seen by other players next to or behind the pachinko machine 1. The effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be entertained only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the production by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and deteriorating the interest by being looked into by another player, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light when the effect is presented by the 244, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more noticeable as compared with the case where the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a dot shape. Even if the consciousness of the above is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to make it easier to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc., and it is interesting to enjoy the production by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246, etc. It can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, the light emission mode is different from that of other light emitting decorations, and it is possible to reduce misidentification as light emission of the light emitting decoration. It is possible to surely notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like.

Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at a position on the rear side of the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light, It is possible to make it easier for the light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like to enter the player's field of view, and it is possible to make the light emitted by the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like notice and enjoy the production of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

Further, an effect operation unit 200 having an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is hit in the game area 5a. Since the player who checks the amount of the game ball to be inserted turns his / her line of sight at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. are used when the line of sight is directed to the upper plate 201. It is easy to enter the field of view, and it is easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player directs his / her line of sight to the upper plate 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Therefore, when the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, when the effect operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like from the lower side, the effect unit 200 is arranged above the game area 5a. Compared with the above, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and it is possible to surely draw the player's attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to entertain the production by the operation unit 200 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, the center of the player's line of sight is located at any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, the player can surely pay attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the touch panel 246 is provided in the effect operation unit 200, in addition to the image effect, the player can also perform the effect of operating the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by various effects. By having the player operate the touch panel 246, the player can participate in the production, and the player can actively entertain the production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting unit 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B sends the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). It is arranged along the guiding passage portion 212a to be fed, and the upper plate ball removing button 239 for operating the upper plate ball removing unit 310 is arranged between the guiding passage portion 212a and the guiding passage portion 212a. That is, the linear light emitting lens member 237 is provided near the place where the player confirms the game ball required for the game, and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, and the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246). It is possible to make it easier to notice the timing of touch operation, etc.).

Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to the upper surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Since it is placed at a higher position than the touch unit 220B and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate 201 can be exposed to the outside air on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 or the game ball. Even if the condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (above the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for luminescent decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. It is possible to prevent defects such as short circuit and corrosion in the decorative substrate 235 after the upper plate without being exposed to the water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200, when the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration exciter 242, a plurality (two) of the touch units 220B are generated. Since it is mounted on the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A while sandwiching the damper 222, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and damped by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. Therefore, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, only the touch unit 220B vibrates. It is possible to sufficiently impart a feeling of operation of the 246, and it is possible to entertain the player with the touch operation of the touch panel 246 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibrating device 242, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B in addition to the operation feeling of the touch panel 246, and suggests the timing to operate the touch panel 246. It is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by a plurality of dampers 222, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pushed from the upper side and an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the damper 222 will be used. Since it is possible to absorb the impact and the like, it is possible to reduce the damage of the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A and the like due to the impact and the like, and the game is interrupted due to the damage of the touch unit 220B and the like. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered.

Further, since the touch panel 220B is operated by the touch panel 246, when the player operates the touch panel, the touch panel 246 is touched for a longer time than when the button is pressed. If the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when the 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is being operated by vibrating the player's finger, a sufficient feeling of operation can be given to the player, and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. However, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest.

Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to correspond to various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and losing his interest by various productions. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is equipped with a touch panel 246, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch, as compared with the conventional pressing button. Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, a wider variety of operation effects can be performed, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B is mounted so as to be movable upward and downward with respect to the mounting base unit 220A (unit case 231), and the touch unit 220B is provided by the elastic force (urging force) of the plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, so that the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the touch panel 246 can be operated accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, the player can be made to think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B which is thought to not move is vibrated according to the game state. It is possible to surprise the player by vibrating by the device 242, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other, for example, it is strong by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates the touch panel 246 at a position different from the position to be operated, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is notified that the operation is incorrect. This makes it possible for the player to perform the correct operation, and it is possible to entertain the operation effect using the touch panel 246 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 that are separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position of the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can be done. Therefore, by controlling each vibration device 242 so that the resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further feeling of operation and greatly surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pushed from above and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 sandwiched between them. Therefore, the impact from the upper side can be absorbed (attenuated) to some extent by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the abutting portion 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the tubular receiving portion 230c into which the abutting portion 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving portion 231e and the tubular receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward due to an impact or a load from the touch unit 220B. The impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact or the like is further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231 and transmitted to the mounting base 230. Since the outer peripheral wall of the impact portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the impact portion 231e and the tubular receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the impact portion 231e (unit case). 231) Impacts and loads from the side are transmitted diagonally to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and are perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. It will be disassembled in the vertical direction, and the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend will be reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pushed from above, the impact and the like can be effectively damped by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231 and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B and the like. It is possible to prevent the mounting base unit 220A from being damaged.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. FIG. 54A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 54B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 55 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 55 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 56 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 520 of the present embodiment is attached to the front side of the unit main body 522 and the shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and the front side is open. It includes a flat plate-shaped lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is a penetrating ball that communicates the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. The passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 which is open to the rear on the right side of the front view of the penetrating ball passage 526 and can communicate with the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. It has.

Further, the foul cover unit 520 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 528, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is fired by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. The foul ball receiving port 530 that receives the game ball (foul ball) and the game ball that is open forward at the lower right corner of the front view and are received by the full tank ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 are released. It also includes a ball discharge port 532 that communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the dish unit 200.

Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed by the unit body 522 and the lid member 524 between the full tank ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the ball discharging port 532, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible size, and a flat plate-shaped movable piece 534 which constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 533 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 522, are movable. It includes a full tank detection sensor 535 that detects rotation of the piece 534 in a direction away from the storage passage 533, and a spring 536 that urges the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533.

In this foul cover unit 520, if the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 533 has a certain amount of space. The number of game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves away from the storage passage 533 due to the weight of the game balls. The rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 535 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game balls is stopped and the payout of the game balls is stopped. It is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. to that effect and urge the lower plate 202 to be filled up.

Further, the foul cover unit 520 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 526 on the rear side of the unit main body 522, and is a taxiway opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later in the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 537 capable of contacting the operating protrusion 863e of the 863 is provided (see FIG. 79). The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating protrusion 863e of the taxiway door member 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing portion 863 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 537, the taxiway door member 863 rotates and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. ) Can be released.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. It includes a main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600. ..

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and a right side surface of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. It is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame base 600 on the rear side along the upper side and the left side in the front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 that pays out the game ball to the player side, a board unit 900 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body that is openably attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape having a front view extending vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a height range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game. The game board mounting portion 602, which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board mounting portion 602 project upward from the center in the left-right direction and are left and right at the lower end of the game board 5. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the movement to the rear.

Further, the main body frame 4 is front and rear on the right side of the front view of the launcher mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launcher 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 and the front view of the launcher mounting portion 604. Cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the bass speaker of the board unit 900, which penetrates back and forth from the center of the front view of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and below. The connection opening 606 that faces the front and the circular speaker opening 607 that penetrates the front and rear on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 602 and faces the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 forward. And have.

Further, the main body frame 4 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 601 to the rear in a plate shape, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 980 is rotatably attached to the rear end. The rear extension portion 608 is provided. Further, the main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge for mounting the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. It is provided with a mounting portion 610.

Further, the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower on the left side of the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602. It is provided with a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

The upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side has an upper hinge main body 621 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 621 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621, which penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side of the front view of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. It is provided with an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for the purpose. The downwardly bent portion of the upper hinge main body 621 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 of the main body frame 4.

The lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side penetrates vertically through the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641. A lower hinge hole for the outer frame (not shown) that is pivotally supported by the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2, and a flat plate that is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. The rear part of the shaped plate material is bent upward in an L shape and penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 and the lower hinge second main body 643, and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 is inserted. The lower hinge hole 644 for the door frame for supporting the shaft and the lower hinge hole 644 for the door frame at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend rearward from the left end and extend upward from the door frame. A regulation piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of 3 is provided.

In the lower hinge second main body 643, the horizontally extended portion is above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 with a certain interval, and the portion bent upward is the lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion of the main body 641. In the main body side lower hinge member 640, the portions of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 that are bent upward are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The reinforcing frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side when viewed from the front) of the main body frame base 600, and also enters the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57, 59 and 60. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat plate-shaped launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and a rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 681 when viewed from the front, and the rotation axis is attached to the launch base 681. A launch solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid that penetrates and extends forward, a ball hammer 683 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launch solenoid 682, and a ball hammer 683 that extends diagonally upward to the left from the vicinity of the tip. It is equipped with a launch rail 684, which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 so that the game ball can roll.

In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle lever 504 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball struck by the ball hammer 683 is guided through the launch rail 684 by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, etc., between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). Then, it falls into the rail ball receiving port 530 of the lower rail cover unit 520, passes through the inside of the rail cover unit 520, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4, and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units 701 that protrude forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. The door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 that project rearward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the outer frame 2, and a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 that project from the lower part of the unit base 701 to the front in a columnar shape from the front side. It includes a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 according to the rotation direction of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Payout unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 72. FIG. 61 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 65 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. Further, FIG. 67A is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 67B is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 70A is a front view of the payout device, and FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 70A. Further, FIG. 71 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and FIG. 71 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. Is. FIG. 72 is an enlarged explanatory view showing a portion of the payout blade in the payout device.

Further, FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 74 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 74 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 78A is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and FIG. 78B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. .. Further, FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the payout unit.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper part of the payout unit base 801. It is attached to the ball tank 802 that stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall (not shown) in the shape of a box that extends upward and to the left and right, and the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802. It is equipped with a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in the front view. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left and aligned in two front-rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 80) that hangs swingably from above.

Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and the ball guide unit 820 below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guidance unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And have. Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the game balls are paid out one by one from the payout device 830.

Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and also guides the game balls downward according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward and guides the game ball forward from the front end of the door frame 3. A taxiway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the full taxiway 862 that guides to the full tank ball receiving port 530, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. The lower full tank path unit 860 and the like are provided.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. The ball guidance unit 820 has a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has an open front side, and a front case. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends are connected to the front case 821 and the rear race 822 through the partition plate 823. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826 that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are arranged in the front case and the rear case, respectively. It is equipped with a pair of ball breakage detection sensors 827 that are mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational positions of a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826.

The front case 821 has a ball guidance inlet 821a that is open so that the game ball can pass in the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. It is provided with a guide passage 821c that communicates the 821b, the ball guidance inlet 821a, and the ball guidance outlet 821b, and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. It is composed of a detection unit 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 821f that extends from the detection unit 821d in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 821e in the guidance passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guidance inlet 822a that is open so that the game ball can pass in the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. It is provided with a guide passage 822c that communicates the 822b, the ball guidance inlet 822a, and the ball guidance outlet 822b, and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. It is composed of a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 822f that extends from the detection unit 822d in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822 g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 822e in the guidance passage 822c.

After this, the rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and in a state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the guidance passage 821c and the guidance passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. There is.

The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. The extension portion 825c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a from the upper end of the movable piece 825c, and the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole protruding outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d and penetrating back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. The detection piece 825f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 825a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 825 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 825e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d is located directly below the shaft hole 825b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 825a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guidance passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is provided. It is in a state of being in contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 821c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction (to the right in the front view) of the movable piece member front 825 so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. Match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball breakage detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The movable piece member rear 826 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a from the upper end of the movable piece 826a, and the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. The connecting portion 826d, the weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d and penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. The detection piece 826f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 826a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 826 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 826e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d is located directly below the shaft hole 826b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 826a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guidance passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It is in a state of being in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 822c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (to the right in the front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. Match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f in front of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

The ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a row in the front-rear direction by a tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. The 822 can guide the lower payout device 830 in two rows back and forth (see FIG. 80). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by a partition plate 823, the game balls circulating in the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and are satisfactorily distributed. Can be done.

Further, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a come into contact with each other. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate in the direction corresponding to the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are not detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that the game balls are in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

Then, when the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball in the guidance passages 821c and 822c flows downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes a movable piece at the upper part of the detection units 821e and 822e. It bounces toward the 825a and 826a sides and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, the movable pieces 825a and 826a are sandwiched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dust, etc., and the movable pieces 825, 826a can be satisfactorily rotated by its own weight or the like.

Further, the ball guidance unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826, and also detects the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of 826 after one member is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game balls in any of the guidance passages 821c and 822c are exhausted, the movable piece member front 825 Alternatively, the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 820f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. .. Therefore, since the out-of-ball of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be replenished promptly, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. It can be suppressed.

Further, by screwing a metal screw as a weight into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight Therefore, the lower end side of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dirt, etc. do not get caught between the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall. It is possible to rotate satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

As described above, in the ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment, in the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end side projects into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game ball flows due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of metal screws to the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a depends on the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826 and the weight of the weight. , 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passage 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c are formed. Etc. do not adhere to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dirt, etc. do not get caught between the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826 (825 in front of the movable piece member and 826 after the movable piece member) can be prevented from rotating.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e which are the through holes, the weight is attached even if the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate frequently. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member (weight mounting portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time. .. Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screws into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, so that the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified. This makes it possible to reduce the cost associated with assembling the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the guidance passages 821c and 822c, an introduction portion 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c is provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 825c project inward. Since the game ball flows in the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, due to the vibration of the movable pieces 825a and 826a, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be removed, and the movable pieces can be moved by their own weight or the like. The front 825 of the single member and the 826 after the movable single member can be made to rotate satisfactorily.

Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be satisfactorily rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be reliably detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to false positives and the like. Further, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the presence or absence of the game balls can be quickly detected. By replenishing the game balls and shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Payout device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, and has a payout entrance 831a that is open so that the game ball can pass through in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a game ball is open so that the game ball can pass near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The payout outlet 831b, the ball outlet 831c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout entrance 831a and the payout outlet 831b are connected to each other, and the game ball can be distributed through the payout passage 831d. , And a front box 831 having a ball removal passage 831e, which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 831c and allows game balls to circulate, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-shaped box with an open front side, a payout entrance 832a that is open so that the game ball can pass through in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a payout that is open so that the game ball can pass near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The exit 832b, the ball ejection outlet 832c which is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout entrance 832a and the payout outlet 832b are connected to each other, and the payout passage 832d where the game ball can be distributed, and the payout. It is provided with a rear box 832 having a ball-extracting passage 832e, which branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball-extracting outlet 832c so that game balls can be distributed.

Further, the payout device 830 has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and the rear side is open, and a rotating shaft mounted in the front box 831 so that the rotating shaft penetrates the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 mesh with each other and can rotate with the front box 831 and the front cover 833. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 rotatably penetrate, and the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and the rear end is attached. A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 which is rotatably attached through the shaft member 837 and the payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. It is equipped with a payout blade 839 that is arranged inside and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the payout blade 839. ing.

Further, the payout device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat plate-shaped partition plate 841 that separates the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. The payout detection sensor 842, which is attached between the box and the rear box 832 and detects the game ball that is paid out by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and is discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, the payout passages 831d and 832d, and the ball removal passage A movable ball removal piece 843 that is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832 at the portion where the 831e and 832e are branched and can close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and the front box 831 and the rear. The box 832 is provided with a ball pulling lever 844 that is slidably attached up and down on the upper right side of the front view and makes the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball ejection port 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the front box 831. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 831d.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 831d extending diagonally from the payout entrance 831a to the lower right is further extended, and is about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the front box 831 is formed on a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 831d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 831b, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 831 g for mounting the ball pulling lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball ejection port 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 832d.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 832d extending diagonally from the payout entrance 832a to the lower right is further extended, and the height of the rear box 832 is about 1/3 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed on a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 832d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 832 g for slidably mounting the ball pulling lever 844 up and down.

The payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the back box 832 and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f, 832f and the payout outlets 831b, 832b. That is, the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the guide shelves 831f and 832f, respectively. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

The driven gear 837 protrudes radially from the rear surface of the spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an interval of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It includes a plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that projects rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and has irregularities formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end so that it can be connected to the payout blade 839. ..

The payout blades 839 extend in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and project from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The plurality (three) front blades 839b and the plurality (three) of the front blades 839b project from the rear end of the base cylinder 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be staggered. (3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a in a tubular shape and has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. It is equipped with 839d.

The front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c of the payout blades 839 are provided with three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c rotate with respect to the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset in the direction at an angle of 60 degrees and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumferences of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 72). That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer circumferences of the front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is said to be four times.

Therefore, the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) can hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball. it can. In other words, it can accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodating portion 839e).

In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the payout device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blades 839 are arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at locations where the front box 821 and the rear box 832 are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located directly below the portion extending vertically downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Then, at the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 61). In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

As a result, the payout device 830 can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839 and can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball accommodating portion 839e makes the diameter D1 1 of the outer diameter of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to 1/4 is accommodated, the time required for accommodating the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. As a result, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated at high speed, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

The ball-pulling movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions, and has a main body portion 843a in which the lower portion is bent to form a front view shape and a tubular shape in the front-rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A barrel portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c that protrudes from the upper part of the outer surface of the main body portion 843a that is bent in a dogleg shape, and a main body portion 843c. It is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 71) formed of through holes penetrating back and forth at the lower portion bent in a dogleg shape.

In the state where the payout device 830 is assembled, the ball pulling movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower part of the main body part 843a extends diagonally to the lower left in the front view, and the upper end shaft tube part 843b pays out the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is rotatable at a portion extending diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the outlets 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side of the front view slightly above the portion that bends downward. It is attached to.

In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment is in a state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 hits the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843 from the right side when viewed from the front. I'm in contact. As a result, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 71 (a)).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a that is bent in a dogleg shape of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. Extends to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball pulling movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left side forms a part of the wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. doing.

The ball pulling movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball pulling movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the front view of the vertical line passing through the center of the barrel portion 843b under a normal state, and its own weight. A force is acting to rotate the ball counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but the ball pulling lever 844 regulates the rotation counterclockwise, so that the normal state is maintained.

When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The regulation of movement is lifted. Therefore, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the barrel portion 843b. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 60 (b)). As a result, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e, and the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e are circulated and discharged downward from the ball-extracting outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball pulling movable piece 843 is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d, the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward by screwing and mounting a weight made of a metal screw into the weight mounting portion 843d. When the restriction on the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is lifted, the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball-extracting passages 381e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

Further, in a normal state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game ball entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball-pulling movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust, dust, etc. that are sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, and the dust can be removed. It is possible to prevent the ball-extracting movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting dust or the like.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d which is a through hole and mounted, even if the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight can be pulled out and the ball pulling movable piece 843. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight mounting portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-extracting movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. It is possible to reduce the cost related to.

By the way, when the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball pulling movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball pulling movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft rusts, resulting in a ball. The pull-out movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a is brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843, the ball pulling passage 831e is provided by the ball pulling movable piece 843. , 832e is closed, and when the ball pulling lever 844 to release the closing is slid upward to unlock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the impact of the contact causes the ball to come into contact with the movable piece 843. The ball pulling movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

Therefore, when the ball pulling lever 844 is operated to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the ball pulling movable piece 843 can rotate satisfactorily, so that the game ball can be pulled out reliably. , Workability at the time of maintenance etc. can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 at a position below the payout device 830. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 with the rear side open, and the upper full tank base 851 is attached to the rear side and the front side is open. It includes a box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a payout device pressing member 853 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and can press the payout device 830 upward.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that opens upward so that a game ball can pass through a portion on the left side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface. It is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for distributing game balls, a normal discharge port 850d opening downward at a portion directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage The full tank discharge port 850e, which is open downward at the lower end of the passage 850c except for the normal discharge port 850d, and the upper sphere storage passage which protrudes upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. It is provided with a partition section 850f that partitions the lower part of the 850c to the left and right.

Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 has an upper ball removing passage 850 g that guides the game ball that has entered from the upper ball removing entrance 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removing passage 850 g. It is equipped with a ball removal outlet 850h. The upper full tank path unit 850 is opened downward with the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball extraction outlet 850h arranged in this order from the left side when viewed from the front. Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 is provided with a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 at the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located directly below the payout outlet 831b of the payout device 830 in a state of being assembled to the payout unit 800, and the upper ball ejection port 850b is located. It is located directly below the ball ejection port 831c of the payout device 830. Further, in a state where the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled in the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball ejection port 850h are the normal taxiways of the lower full tank path unit 860. The 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball-extracting taxiway 865 each have an opening directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 80).

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game ball discharged downward from the payout outlet 831b, which is paid out by the payout device 830, enters the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. When the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a opens directly under the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

When the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, the door frame 3 is normally released. The exit 850d is closed. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper sphere storage passage 850c get over the partition 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

In this way, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls discharged from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 according to the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 202.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full tank path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full taxiway unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full taxiway unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 normal taxiway 861. A full taxiway 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the full tank reception port 530 of the door frame 3 and the normal taxiway 862. The taxiway opening and closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end opening of the taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the taxiway opening and closing door 863 are the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. It is provided with a closing spring 864, which is urged to close the front end opening of the door.

Further, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball extraction outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and is above the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900 from the central right end in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a lower ball removal taxiway 865 for discharging to.

In the lower full tank taxiway unit 860, the normal taxiway 861, the full taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in the front view. The rear ends of the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are open upward. Further, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. The normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts as shown in the figure.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotatably attached in the front-view clockwise direction by the closing spring 864. Being urged. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full taxiway unit 860, the full taxiway 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 in front view, is one game with respect to the normal taxiway 861. It is placed at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is normally attached below the taxiway 861 and at a position on the left side of the full taxiway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate 863b that extends diagonally to the upper left from the base 863a and can close the front end opening of the taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c that extends from the base portion 863a to the right in a flat plate shape and can close the front end opening of the full taxiway 862, and an extension portion 863d that extends diagonally from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. The extension portion 863d is provided with an actuating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip portion and is capable of contacting the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass through. The actuating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base portion 863a in a front view, and is inclined so that the front end surface protrudes forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged in the clockwise direction in the front view by the closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is urged from the lower side of the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower cover 867. By abutting on the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

The lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has the pachinko machine 1 assembled, and the front end thereof is the through ball passage 526, the full tank receiver 530, and the door opening / closing contact in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3. It is mounted at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 79). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 does not come into contact with the operating protrusion 863e. Therefore, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 has an urging force of the closing spring 864. The second door plate portion 863c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 78). (A). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full taxiway are guided. No game ball spills from Road 862.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 and operates. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force that tends to rotate the taxiway opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front acts against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 is opened (see FIG. 78 (b)). In this state, as shown, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full taxiway 862. ..

In the state where the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 are filled. The through ball passage 526 and the full tank ball receiving port 528 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, and penetrate from the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 side. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank ball receiving port 528 side.

In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are opened by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the taxiway is opened and closed, the operating range of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more game balls are released from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 201. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game ball is further discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the section 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 201 and the game balls cannot be supplied to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 533 of the above. Then, when the movable piece 534 rotates due to the game ball being stored in the storage passage 533 and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full with the game ball. Is notified, and the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is canceled.

Note that the payout device 830 stops paying out the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. In this state, the number of storage passages 533 on the upstream side, the full taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850 can be filled. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, in a game state in which a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are paid out by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and it is possible to dedicate the player to the jackpot game and entertain it.

[4-7. Board unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and has a bass speaker inside. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 to control the interface inside. A payout control board that is mounted across the interface control board box 940 that houses the board and the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and that houses the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls. It has a box 950 and.

The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 87 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 142) that controls the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of 1100, main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and mounted on the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first major winning opening 2005 and a second major winning opening 2006, which can accept game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second major winning opening 2006 is composed of two major winning openings, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which the game balls are distributed (Fig.). 87).

Further, the table unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the skill area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is arranged in a box-shaped back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage front unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The mechanism 3020, the right ball passage unit 3030 for discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500, which are attached to the right end of the front view in the back box 3010. A lower right ball passage unit that is attached near the front end of the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010 and for discharging the game balls received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with 3035.

Further, the back unit 3000 is rotatably attached to the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 housed in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. It includes a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper and front sides open, and is inclined so that the bottom surface is lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. When the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, it can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201 (see FIG. 85).

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and 142. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the game status and two LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display consisting of a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and a lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002. (1) A first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the results of a special lottery, and a first special holding number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls into the first starting port 2002. And the second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs that display the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. The second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of such holds, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" etc., the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize It mainly includes a round indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the mouth 2006.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 86. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 142) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (FIG. 142. reference).

[5-7. Main liquid crystal display device]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. It is equipped with 1602. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and lower the lock mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83 and 85 to 87. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is provided, and the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided so that the game balls can be accepted at either of them.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning openings 2001 arranged near the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a are arranged directly above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second major winning opening 2006 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first starting opening 2002 and above the first winning opening 2005.

As shown in FIG. 87, the second major winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game balls circulate. It is composed of. In the second major winning opening 2006, the second upper winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower winning opening 2006b is the front view of the second upper winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

Further, the table unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the skill area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88A is a perspective view of the starting port unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 88B is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the rear. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005.

The starting port unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first large winning opening 2005 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right and penetrates back and forth, and the first unit base 2101. The ball receiving portion 2102, which protrudes forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction to form the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, above the large winning opening 2005. The ball guiding unit 2103 that guides the game ball received in 2002 downward, the first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detects the game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and the first It includes a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first winning opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened forward with approximately the same size as the first winning opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. The first prize opening door is a horizontally long rectangular and flat plate with the lower side rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111. The member 2112, the first attacker solenoid 2113 installed in the unit case 2111 and driving the opening and closing of the door member 2112, and the first large winning opening 2005 installed in the unit case 2111. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 that detects the game ball, the first starting opening sensor 2104 attached to the upper surface of the unit case 2111, the first attacker solenoid, the first big winning opening sensor, and the main control board 1310. A start port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection of the above, and a start port unit decoration board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and for illuminating the first prize opening 2005. There is.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is opened upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. The first large winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 opens forward in a size capable of accepting a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding unit 2103. It can be guided downward on the rear side of the 2101, detected by the first start port sensor 2104, and then discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided, and on the main control board 1310, when the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. Thereby, it is possible to detect an illegal act due to an illegal insertion of a tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the mouth 2005 from behind to close the first prize opening 2005. In the upright state where the first prize opening door member 2112 is closed, the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is forward and By rotating the door so as to move downward, the first prize opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

The first large winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first large winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first large winning opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be in the positioned state. That is, the first grand prize opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first grand prize opening 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first prize opening 2005 and comes into contact with the first prize opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first prize opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear and is accepted by the first prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first prize opening 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first prize opening sensor 2114.

[5-8b. Under the side unit]
Next, the 2200 below the side unit of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 (a) is a perspective view of the front side unit and the top of the side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 89 (b) is a perspective view of the bottom of the side unit and the top of the side unit as viewed from the rear. The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit lower 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

The side unit lower 2200 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2201 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extending in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and the unit base 2201 projecting forward from the front surface and upward and upward. The rear is open and each of the three ball receiving portions 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 and the rear end of the ball receiving portion 2202 are communicated with each other and protrude rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2201. It is provided with a gutter portion 2203 that guides the game ball received in the winning opening 2001 to the rear.

The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left side of the front view. The three ball receiving portions 2202 are separated from each other to the left and right and project from the front surface of the unit base 2201. The ball receiving portion 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 is open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time.

The side unit lower 2200 is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the leftmost general winning opening 2001 in the front view is located slightly to the right of the right end of the side unit upper 2300. The side unit lower 2200 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1112 by the gutter portion 2203, respectively. Then, the game ball guided to the rear of the panel plate 1112 is a general winning opening sensor 3015 installed in the back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 in the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 125). Is detected by and discharged downward.

[5-8c. On the side unit]
Next, the 2300 on the side unit of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 89. The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 in the game area 5a.

The side unit upper 2300 has a flat plate-shaped unit base 2301 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and a shelf portion 2302 extending forward from the front surface of the unit base 2301 and extending to the left and right so that the right end side in the front view is lowered. And have. The shelf portion 2302 extends from the left end to the right end of the unit base 2301.

In the state where the side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf portion 2302 is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right by the shelf portion 2302. It can be guided to the direction (center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a).

[5-8d. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. FIG. 90 is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 92 is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the flow path on the right side of the center accessory. Further, FIG. 93 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 93 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line FF in (a).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and is located in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the production unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. it can. The center accessory 2500 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006.

The center accessory 2500 includes a flat plate frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the peripheral edge of the opening 1112 that largely penetrates the center of the panel plate 1112 and forward from the flange portion 2511. A frame-like frame having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that protrudes and prevents the game ball from entering the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that protrudes rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening 1112. It is equipped with a center base 2510. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. Further, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 has the highest position on the upper side slightly to the left from the center in the left-right direction.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a warp entrance 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open to enter on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 at a substantially central outer peripheral surface in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view. The warp passage 2521 that guides the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 to the lower end of the left side of the front view in the front peripheral wall portion 2512, and the game ball that has passed through the warp passage 2521 can be released and heads backward at the lower end of the warp passage 2521. The warp outlet 2522 (see FIG. 87) and the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 are moved to the center side in the left-right direction along the lower side in the frame of the center base 2510 and behind the flange portion 2511. The guide path 2523 to be guided and the game ball guided by the guide path 2523 can be supplied from the left end in the front view, and extend to the left and right along the lower side within the frame at the center of the center base 2510 in the left-right direction. It includes a stage 2530, which rolls the supplied game ball in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2530 is curved so that both the left and right ends of the front view are high and the left and right sides of the portion corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction are the lowest, and the stage 2530 swells so as to be slightly higher between the lowest portions. It is out. That is, the stage 2530 is formed in a W shape with a gentle slope. The stage 2530 is formed at the apex of a portion that is slightly higher than the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a fan-shaped central guide portion 2531 that lowers forward and slightly expands to the left and right, and a central guide portion 2531. It is provided with a fan-shaped side guide portion 2532, which is formed in each of the two lowest parts on both the left and right sides of the above, and which is lowered toward the front and spreads to the left and right.

In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 enters the warp entrance 2520 in the game area 5a, and the game ball supplied to the stage 2530 via the warp passage 2521, the warp exit 2522, and the taxiway 2523 is provided. It is discharged forward from either the central guide portion 2531 or the side guide portion 2532 of the stage 2530, and is returned (refluxed) into the game area 5a again. Further, in the stage 2530, when the game board 5 is assembled, the first starting port 2002 is located directly under the central guidance portion 2531, and when the game ball is discharged from the central guidance portion 2531 into the game area 5a. , It is accepted by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the center accessory 2500, a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends substantially vertically downward from the right end of the front view on the upper side of the center base 2510 to the vicinity of the substantially center in the vertical direction. The front peripheral wall so that the right end side is slightly lowered from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a to the vicinity of the inner circumference of the game area 5a (near the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000) in the state where the game board 5 is assembled. The upper right lateral wall portion 2512b in which a part of the portion 2512 extends to the right, and the right hanging wall portion in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends downward from the right end of the upper right lateral wall portion to approximately the same height as the stage 2530. It includes a 2512c and a lower right lateral wall portion 2512d in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends to the left so as to be slightly lower from the lower end of the right hanging wall portion 2512c toward the center side in the left-right direction.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right lateral wall portion 2512b in cooperation with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and is formed in the upper right distribution space 2541 in which the game ball can be distributed, and the upper right. On the right side of the front view of the right hanging wall portion 2512c that communicates with the distribution space 2541, a right flow passage 2542 that allows the game ball to flow downward, and a game ball that communicates with the right flow passage 2542 and is formed below the lower right lateral wall portion 2512d. It is provided with a lower right distribution space 2543 that can be distributed and can communicate with the game area 5a. The upper right distribution space 2541, the right flow passage 2542, and the lower right distribution space 2543 form a right-handed game area 2540 in the game area 5a.

The upper right circulation space 2541 is a space having a predetermined size whose vertical and horizontal dimensions are sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can flow down by a free path. The right-hand flow passage 2542 is bent so that the vicinity of the lower end extending vertically downward extends diagonally to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the width in the left-right direction is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. It is possible to let the game balls flow down in a row up and down.

The lower right distribution space 2543 extends to the left from directly below the portion communicating with the lower end of the right flow passage 2542 so that the left end side in the front view becomes lower, and then opens to the left with the second attacker passage 2543a. (Ii) A discharge passage 2543b that communicates with the right end of the attacker passage 2543a in the front view and extends downward, and a second that penetrates the flange portion 2511 and opens rearward at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b so that the game ball can pass through. It is equipped with a two-out port 2543c. The second attacker passage 2543a of the lower right circulation space 2543 is a passage whose vertical dimension is about twice the outer diameter of the game ball, and the discharge passage 2543b has the left and right dimensions outside the game ball. The passage is slightly wider than the diameter. The lower right distribution space 2543 is assembled on the game board 5, and the left end (downstream end) of the second attacker passage 2543a is on the left side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, and the first start port 2002 and the first large. It opens to the left at a height between the winning opening 2005 and the game ball is discharged into the game area 5a from the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is sent to the rear of the flange portion 2511 (game panel 1100) through the second out port 2543c that opens at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b, and is returned to the game area 5a. It is discharged from the game board 5 without being removed.

The upper right circulation space 2541 has an open front as a whole, and a flange extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right lateral wall portion 2512b at a portion substantially lower half in the vertical direction at the rear It is closed by part 2511. The right flow passage 2542 is closed by a flat plate-shaped transparent right front decorative plate 2544 whose front extends from the position of the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the right hanging wall portion 2512c to the right in the front view, and the rear is the right hanging wall. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the portion 2512c. The lower right distribution space 2543 is closed by a flat plate-shaped transparent lower right front decorative plate 2545 whose front extends downward from the position of the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the lower right horizontal wall portion 2512d, and the rear is the lower right horizontal wall. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the portion 2512d.

The center accessory 2500 is provided with a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 that project inside the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 and extend in a direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball. In the right flow passage 2542, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 project alternately from the surfaces of the right front decorative plate 2544 and the flange portion 2511 facing each other in the distribution direction of the game ball at predetermined intervals. The plurality of reduction ribs 2546 in the right flow passage 2542 have a distance between the reduction ribs 2546 on the right front decorative plate 2544 side and the flange portion 2511 side, which is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the distance between the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the right front decorative plate 2544 and the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed to be narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, in the vertically extending right-hand flow passage 2542, the game ball always flows down in a zigzag manner, and a sufficient damping force can be applied to the acceleration due to gravity.

On the other hand, in the lower right distribution space 2543, a plurality of reduction ribs 2546 alternately project from the surfaces of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511 facing each other at predetermined intervals in the distribution direction of the game ball. .. The plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the lower right distribution space 2543 are set so that the distance between the deceleration ribs 2546 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball between the lower right decorative plate 2545 side and the flange portion 2511 side. There is. Further, the distance between the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed to be narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, even in the lower right distribution space 2543, the game balls always flow down in a zigzag manner, the distribution speed of the game balls is attenuated, and the distribution speed of the game balls is prevented from becoming too fast.

In the present embodiment, the upper right distribution space 2541 is provided with one general winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003, and the second starting port 2004, and the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped.

More specifically, the gate portion 2003 is provided so as to project forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 extending from the upper rear end of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a to the right in the front view, and one game ball is provided. Only formed so that it can pass in the vertical direction. A gate sensor 2547 that detects the passage of a game ball is attached to the gate portion 2003. The gate portion 2003 is arranged slightly to the left of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

The general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500 project forward from the front of the flange portion 2511 that closes the lower half behind the upper right distribution space 2541 below the gate portion 2003. Be prepared for. More specifically, the center accessory 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the general winning opening 2001 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear open at the upper end, and is directly below the general winning opening 2001. On the left side surface of the front view, the ball receiving member 2548 is formed so that the second starting port 2004 opens to the left, and the ball receiving member 2548 and the flange portion 2511 extend around the axis whose lower end extends back and forth. The second start port door member 2549, which is rotatably attached and closes the second start port 2004 so as to be openable and closable, and the second start port door member 2549, which is attached to the rear surface of the flange portion 2511 and is closed, are opened and closed. It includes a start port solenoid 2550 (see FIG. 142) and a second start port sensor 2551 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004.

The general winning opening 2001 of the center accessory 2500 is opened with a size capable of accepting only one game ball upward from the right side of the front view with respect to directly below the gate portion 2003. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511 and then discharged from the center accessory 2500 to the right in the front view.

The second starting port 2004 opens to the left in the front view directly under the general winning opening 2001, and the second starting port door member 2549 rotates counterclockwise in the front view to open to the left. It becomes possible to accept the game ball. The second starting port door member 2549 has two sides extending so that the outer shape of the front view extends from a base circle forming the lower portion and a point outside the base circle so as to be in contact with the base circle. It is formed in a so-called "dripping shape" as if it is composed of, and is rotatably attached at the center of the base end circle.

In the second starting port 2004, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2550 is de-energized, and the second starting port door member 2549 is in an upright state in which the tip side is located substantially directly above the base end circle. , The second start door member 2549 is closed so that the game ball cannot be accepted. Then, when the start port solenoid 2550 is energized according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, the tip side of the second start port door member 2549 moves to the left in the front view. In addition, the second start door member 2549 rotates and stops rotating with the tip side slightly higher. As a result, the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball can be accepted. In the state where the second starting door member 2549 is rotated and opened, the tip of the second starting door member 2549 is in a state of substantially coincident with the vertical line passing through the center of the gate portion 2003.

The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511, detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, and discharged downward.

The second prize opening 2006 is arranged so as to open upward at the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a in the lower right distribution space 2543. More specifically, the second upper prize opening 2006a constituting the second prize opening 2006 opens upward at the right end of the front view in the second attacker passage 2543a, and is also the second prize opening. The second lower prize opening 2006b constituting the 2006 opens upward in the second attacker passage 2543a on the left side and the lower side of the second upper prize opening 2006a in the front view. The widths of the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are formed within a range of three to four times the outer diameter of the game ball.

The center accessory 2500 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the center base 2510 so as to be able to open and close the second upper prize opening 2006a that opens upward, and the front end is the front surface of the flange portion 2511. It is attached to the flat plate-shaped second upper prize opening door member 2552, which protrudes forward and closes the second upper prize opening 2006a and is inclined so that the left end side of the front view is lower, and the rear surface of the center base 2510. The second upper prize opening door member 2552 is opened and closed, and the second upper prize opening solenoid 2553 and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 (FIG. 142) that detects the game ball received in the second upper prize opening 2006a. The second lower prize opening 2006b that opens upward is supported by the center base 2510 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the front end is from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. Also protrudes forward and closes the second lower prize opening 2006b, and is attached to the flat plate-shaped second lower prize opening door member 2555 that is inclined so that the left end side of the front view is lower, and the rear surface of the center base 2510. The second lower attacker solenoid 2556 that opens and closes the second lower prize opening door member 2555, and the second lower prize opening sensor 2557 that detects the game ball received in the second lower prize opening 2006b (FIG. 142. See) and.

Further, the center accessory 2500 extends in the left-right direction straddling between the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. A flat plate-shaped cross plate portion 2558 that is inclined so that the left end side of the view is lowered and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a, and a second lower large plate that extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. A flat plate-shaped discharge plate portion 2559 that extends in the left-right direction from the left end of the winning opening 2006b to the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a so as to be lower on the left end side and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a. And have. The length of the transfer plate portion 2558 in the left-right direction is formed within a range of 2 to 3 times the outer diameter of the game ball. The left and right lengths of the discharge plate portion 2559 are formed within a range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

In the second attacker passage 2543a, a plurality of reduction ribs 2546 extend vertically, and on each side of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511, rows are arranged in the left-right direction at intervals slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. It is installed. In the second attacker passage 2543a, as shown in FIG. 93, from the upstream side of the flow of the game ball, the first deceleration rib 2546a, the second deceleration rib 2546b, the third deceleration rib 2546c, the fourth deceleration rib 2546d, Ten deceleration ribs 2546 of the fifth deceleration rib 2546e, the sixth deceleration rib 2546f, the seventh deceleration rib 2546g, the eighth deceleration rib 2546h, the ninth deceleration rib 2546i, and the tenth deceleration rib 2546j are provided. The odd-numbered reduction ribs 2546 are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the even-numbered reduction ribs 2546 are provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545.

Further, the positional relationship between the first deceleration ribs 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j and the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b will be described in detail. The first deceleration rib 2546a is arranged slightly to the right of the left end of the front view of the second upper prize opening 2006a. The second deceleration rib 2546b is arranged on the left side of the left end of the front view of the second upper prize opening 2006a and near the right end of the transfer plate portion 2558. The third deceleration rib 2546c is arranged substantially in the center of the transfer plate portion 2558 in the left-right direction. The fourth deceleration rib 2546d is arranged on the right side of the right end of the front view of the second lower prize opening 2006b and near the left end of the transfer plate portion 2558. The fifth deceleration rib 2546e is arranged on the left side of the right end of the front view of the second lower prize opening 2006. The sixth deceleration rib 2546f is arranged on the right side of the front view at the center of the second lower winning opening 2006b in the left-right direction. The 7th deceleration rib 2546g is arranged on the left side of the center of the second lower winning opening 2006b in the left-right direction in the front view. The eighth deceleration rib 2546h is arranged to the right of the left end of the front view of the second lower prize opening 2006b. The ninth deceleration rib 2546i is arranged from the left end of the front view of the second lower winning opening 2006b to the vicinity of the right end of the discharge plate portion 2559. The tenth deceleration rib 2546j is arranged substantially in the center of the discharge plate portion 2559 in the left-right direction.

Of the first deceleration ribs 2546a to the tenth deceleration ribs 2546j, odd-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 from the first deceleration ribs 2546a to the ninth deceleration ribs 2546i are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the odd-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 are provided. The deceleration rib 2546 extends over the entire height from the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the ceiling (lower right lateral wall portion 2512d). Further, among the first deceleration ribs 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j, the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545 is provided with an even number of deceleration ribs 2546 from the second deceleration rib 2546b to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j. The even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 extend from a portion above the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the vicinity of the ceiling (see FIG. 93 (a)).

Of the even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545, the second deceleration rib 2546b and the second deceleration rib 2546b closest to the left end of the front view of the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b, respectively. As shown in FIG. 93A, the lower end of the eighth deceleration rib 2546h is the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a (the upper surface of the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555). It is separated from the lower end of the other deceleration ribs 2546 by a large distance from the upper surface of the other deceleration ribs. More specifically, the lower ends of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h are each at the same distance as the substantially outer diameter of the game ball from the left end of the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b in the front view. , Are formed so as to be separated.

As a result, when the second upper prize opening 2006a or the second lower prize opening 2006b shifts from the open state where the game ball can be accepted to the closed state where the game ball cannot be accepted, the second upper prize opening slides forward. The front end of the door member 2552 or the second lower prize opening door member 2555, the front left end of the second upper winning opening 2006a or the front left end of the second lower winning opening 2006b, and the second deceleration rib 2546b. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging (ball biting) in which the game ball is sandwiched between the lower end or the lower end of the eighth deceleration rib 2546h.

In the state where the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize entrance door member 2555 protrude forward and the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are closed, the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize entrance door member 2555 are closed. A state in which the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 are placed on the upper surfaces of the left end and the right end of the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b. Therefore, the gap between the upper surface of the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 and the lower end of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h is the outer diameter of the game ball. The game ball that is narrower than the above and circulates (rolls) on the upper surface of the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize entrance door member 2555 is the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h. It always comes into contact with the door, and a sufficient damping effect is maintained.

In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 includes a portion of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 from approximately the center in the left-right direction to the right side of the front view, and an inner peripheral surface of the game area 5a (outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000). ), A space with a width in which only one game ball can be distributed is formed. Therefore, when the game ball is driven along the outer rail 1001 so as to be driven to the right of the front view from the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed), the center in the game area 5a. The game ball can be distributed in the right-handed game area 2540 on the right side of the front view of the accessory 2500.

Further, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the left and lower sides of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a and in the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. ing. Therefore, the game ball driven into the game area 5a abuts on the plurality of obstacle nails and circulates downward through various paths.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the back box and the like in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like as viewed from the back.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is arranged in a box-shaped back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage front unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The mechanism 3020, the right ball passage unit 3030 for discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500, which are attached to the right end of the front view in the back box 3010. A lower right ball passage unit that is attached near the front end of the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010 and for discharging the game balls received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with 3035.

One of the plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 is attached to the right ball passage unit 3030. The right ball passage unit 3030 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500 to the bottom of the back box 3010, and then is centered in the left-right direction along the bottom. After guiding to the vicinity, it is guided to the front end of the back box 3010, dropped from the front end of the back box 3010 onto the discharge unit 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, and discharged. The lower right ball passage unit 3035 guides the game balls received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500 to the left in the front view along the bottom inside the back box 3010. The back box 3010 is discharged from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction onto the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 for discharge.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 above the opening 3010a on the left side in the rear view, and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510. The upper relay board 3040 that relays the connection with the upper left decorative board 3253, the upper relay board cover 3041 that is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. A box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 rotatably mounted around an axis extending to the left and right along the lower side of the opening 3010a, and a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 housed in the effect drive board box 3042 from the peripheral control board 1510. The effect drive board 3043 that drives each drive motor, decorative board, etc. based on the control command, and the main control board 1310, which is attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and each winning opening sensor, each solenoid, etc. It is provided with a panel relay board 3044 that relays the connection of the above, and a panel relay board cover 3045 that is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 3044.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98 and the like. The back box 3010 has a box-shaped opening 3010a that is open at the front and squarely penetrates the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b that projects rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. Two fixing grooves 3010c, which are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the main liquid crystal display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back left middle decoration unit]
Next, the back left middle decorative unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 is mounted in the back box 3010 on the left side in the front view, upward from the center in the vertical direction, near the front end. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 is formed with a translucent unit base 3051 attached to the back box 3010 and a decoration attached to the front of the unit base 3051 to three-dimensionally imitate the "middle tile" of mahjong. The translucent back left middle decorative body 3052, the back left middle decorative board 3053 mounted between the back left middle decorative body 3052 and the unit base 3051 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back left middle decorative board 3053. It has.

The back left middle decorative unit 3050 can illuminate the back left middle decorative body 3052 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back left middle decorative substrate 3053.

[5-9c. Movable production unit after the back]
Next, the rear-rear movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 105. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 100 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear-back movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 100 (b) disassembles the back-rear movable effect unit for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the back bottom rear movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the back bottom rear first decorative body and the back bottom rear second decorative body, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled and seen from the back together with the 1st decorative body after the back bottom and the 2nd decorative body after the back bottom. FIG. 103 is an explanatory view showing the drive system of the rear-back movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the rear lower rear movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a rotation of the lower back rear first decorative body and the lower back rear second decorative body together from the normal state. It is a front view of the state where the second decorative surface of the back lower rear second decorative body is facing the front, and (c) is the state of (b) the back lower rear first decorative body and the back lower rear second decorative body. Is a front view of a state in which is moved to the moving end on the left side of the front view. Further, FIG. 105 (d) shows the first decorative surface of the back lower rear first decorative body by rotating the back lower rear first decorative body and the back lower rear second decorative body together in the state of FIG. 104 (c). It is a front view of the state facing the front, and (e) is a front view, in which (e) is rotated from the state of (d) to open the first decorative body after lower back and the second decorative body after lower back. It is a front view of the state where the second decorative surface of the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative surface of the second decorative body after the back bottom are facing the front.

The lower back movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back movable effect unit 3100 is supported by the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back, which are hinge-rotatably supported on one side extending vertically with respect to the axis extending vertically. The rear second decorative body 3120, the rotary drive unit 3130 in which the rear lower rear first decorative body and the back lower rear second decorative body are hinge-rotatably mounted and each can be rotationally driven separately, and the rotary drive unit 3130. The slide unit 3150 is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is mounted in the back box 3010, and the back bottom rear fixed decorative body 3160 is mounted on the front surface of the slide unit 3150.

The first decorative surface 3110 after the back bottom has the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 which are arranged facing each other and have different decorations formed and have translucency, and the first decorative surface. The 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 are supported so as to face each other, and the thin rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body 3113 and the first decorative body 3113 are mounted inside the display screen. The sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 facing outward from the decorative surface 3111 and the side in contact with the second decorative surface 3112 of the four sides extending vertically in the rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body 3113 are outward. The first decorative body is formed between the two first hinge portions 3115, which are projected so as to be able to be supported so as to rotate around the axis extending vertically, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the second decorative surface 3112. It is equipped with a first decorative substrate (not shown), which is mounted inside the main body 3113 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides.

The first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 is formed in a frame shape, and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 faces forward from the frame. The second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back is formed with a decoration with the left half of the characters "holy". The sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 can display a predetermined effect image (effect moving image) by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510.

The two first hinge portions 3115 are vertically separated from each other and are mounted coaxially. These first hinge portions 3115 are hinge-rotatably supported by the second hinge portion 3124 of the second decorative body 3120 after lowering the back. The first decorative substrate after the back bottom can illuminate the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 by appropriately emitting the LEDs on both sides.

The second decorative surface 3120 after the back bottom has the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122, which are arranged facing each other and have different decorations formed and have translucency, and the first decorative surface. The 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 are supported so as to face each other, and the thin rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body 3123 and the rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body 3123 extend vertically. It protrudes outward from the side of the side that is in contact with the second decorative surface 3122, and the two first hinge portions 3115 of the first decorative body 3110 are rotated about the axis extending vertically. A decorative body that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of the three second hinge portions 3124 that can be supported and are separated from each other vertically and the lowermost second hinge portion 3124 of the three second hinge portions 3124. The support shaft 3125, the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 attached to the outer periphery of the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, the bearing member 3127 attached to the lower end lower surface of the decorative body support shaft 3125, and the decorative body support shaft 3125. The second detection piece 3128 extending outward from the outer peripheral surface of the above, and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112 are mounted in the second decorative body 3123, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on both sides. It is equipped with a second decorative substrate (not shown), which is mounted on the lower back.

The first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back is formed with a decoration in which the characters "Tenun" are written vertically. The second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back is formed with a decoration on which the right half of the word "holy" is applied. The second decorative body 3123 of the lower back second decorative body 3120 is formed to be approximately the same size as the first decorative body 3113 of the lower back first decorative body 3110. That is, the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom have external dimensions. They are formed to be approximately the same size.

The three second hinge portions 3124 of the lower back second decorative body 3120 are vertically separated from each other and are coaxially attached to each other, and the lower rear first decorative body is placed between the second hinge portions 3124. The first hinge portion 3115 of 3110 is located and attached to each other so that the hinges can rotate. As a result, the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are in a closed state in which the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3121 face each other by hinge rotation, and the first decorative surface of each other. 3111, 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112, 3122 can be rotated (hinge rotation) from the open state where they are substantially on the same surface. Then, in a state where the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are opened, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are left and right with the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 sandwiched between them. The decorations are integrated and the word "holy" appears. Although detailed illustrations are omitted for the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124, the first decorative surfaces 3111 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120, respectively, The decorations corresponding to the decorations made on the 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are provided, and when the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are opened, the first The one hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are made inconspicuous.

In the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation transmission member 3132 of the rotation drive unit 3130 for hinge-rotating the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom independently of the second decorative body 3120 is rotatable at the upper end portion. Will be inserted. In the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation transmission member 3132 at the upper end and the bearing member 3127 at the lower end are supported by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotation drive unit base 3131 in the rotation drive unit 3130. The decorative body support shaft 3125 is formed to have a length (height) of 75% to 95% with respect to the height of the first decorative surface 3111, 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112, 3122. More specifically, it is formed to have a length of 80% to 90%. As a result, even if the heavy lower back first decorative body 3110 or the like is eccentric on one side extending vertically and the hinge can be rotated by providing the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the lower back first decorative body 3110 or the like is provided. The decorative body 3110 and the like (decorative body support shaft 3125) can be made hard to fall down.

As shown in FIG. 102, the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 has a stopper 3126a protruding from the gear teeth at one place on the outer circumference, and cannot be rotated once. The back lower rear second decorative substrate of the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 can illuminate the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 by appropriately emitting the LEDs on both sides.

The rotary drive unit 3130 of the rear-rear movable production unit 3100 is a rotary drive unit base that rotatably supports the decorative body support shaft 3125 in a box shape with the front side open and is slidably attached to the slide unit 3150 in the left-right direction. The cylindrical sleeve portion 3132a, which is rotatably supported by the 3131 and the rotary drive unit base 3131 and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery of the upper end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125, protrudes upward from the upper end of the sleeve portion 3132a and under the back. One of the connecting portion 3132b attached to the lower part of the rear first decorative body 3110, the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c formed over half a circumference around the lower end portion of the sleeve portion 3132a, and the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c. It includes a rotation transmission member 3132 having a first detection piece 3132d extending outward from the end.

Further, the rotation drive unit 3130 includes a spur gear-shaped first drive gear 3133 that meshes with the first decorative body side actuating gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132, and a rear lower rear first drive motor that rotationally drives the first drive gear 3133. The 3134, the first drive motor bracket 3135 to which the first drive motor 3134 is mounted after the back bottom, and the first drive motor bracket 3135 mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 3136, a lower rear second drive motor 3137 for rotationally driving the second drive gear 3136, and a lower rear second drive motor 3137 are mounted and inside the rotary drive unit base 3131. It includes a second drive motor bracket 3138 to be attached.

Further, the rotation drive unit 3130 is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and can detect the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132. The first rotation detection sensor 3139 and the lower side of the first rotation detection sensor 3139. It is equipped with a second rotation detection sensor 3140, which is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and can detect the second detection piece 3128 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom.

Further, the rotary drive unit 3130 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and includes a sub liquid crystal display device 3114, a back bottom rear first decorative board, a back bottom rear second decorative board, and a back bottom rear first drive motor 3134. The rotation drive unit relay board 3141 that relays the connection between the back bottom rear second drive motor 3137, the first rotation detection sensor 3139, and the second rotation detection sensor 3140 and the back bottom rear relay board 3158 of the slide unit 3150. , Further prepared.

Further, the rotary drive unit 3130 includes a flat plate-shaped unit cover 3142 that closes the front surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131, a rack gear 3143a that is attached to the lower surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131 and extends long to the left and right, and a rack gear. A rack member 3143 having a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3143b formed at the right end of the front view of the 3143a is provided.

The rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape and has a main portion 3131a in which the decorative body support shaft 3125, the back lower rear first drive motor 3134, the back lower rear second drive motor 3137, and the like are housed. A sub-part 3131b, which is substantially cubic in height at about half the height of the main part 3131a and is arranged on the left side of the main part 3131a when viewed from the front and accommodates the rotation drive unit relay board 3141, is provided. The main portion 3131a and the sub portion 3131b of the rotary drive unit base 3131 communicate with each other with their bottom surfaces aligned.

Further, the rotary drive unit base 3131 is provided with a U-shaped upper bearing portion 3131c and a lower bearing portion 3131d whose front end side is open and notched toward the rear on the top plate portion and the bottom plate portion of the main portion 3131a. .. The upper bearing portion 3131c penetrates vertically, and the sleeve portion 3132a of the rotation transmission member 3132 is rotatably inserted. On the other hand, the lower bearing portion 3131d is recessed from the upper side to the lower side and does not penetrate vertically, and the bearing member 3127 of the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back is inserted. The open front end side of the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d is closed by the unit cover 3142.

The rear lower rear first drive motor 3134 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position on the right side of the front view of the decorative body support shaft 3125 via the first drive motor bracket 3135. The rear lower rear second drive motor 3137 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position on the left side of the front view of the decorative body support shaft 3125 via the second drive motor bracket 3138.

The first drive motor 3134 after lowering the back is a connecting portion 3132b that rotates together with the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132 that meshes with the first drive gear 3133 by rotationally driving the first drive gear 3133. The first decorative body 3110 can be rotated after the back bottom. On the other hand, the rear lower rear second drive motor 3137 is driven by the second drive gear 3136 to rotate, so that the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 at the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125 meshes with the second drive gear 3136. The second decorative body 3120 can be rotated together with the decorative body support shaft 3125.

As shown in FIG. 100, the slide unit 3150 of the rear lower rear movable effect unit 3100 is mounted on the box-shaped unit base 3151 which is mounted in the back box 3010 and whose front and upper sides are open, and the upper part in the unit base 3151. The rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 is attached to the front surface, and the slide guide 3152 extending to the left and right is rotatably attached around the axis extending forward and backward approximately in the center of the unit base 3151 in the left-right direction. A transmission gear member having a pinion gear 3153a that meshes with the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and a spur gear-shaped driven gear 3153b that rotates integrally with the pinion gear 3153a and has a diameter larger than that of the pinion gear 3153a. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3154 that meshes with the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3154 that rotationally drives the drive gear 3154, and a rear lower rear third drive motor 3155 that is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3151. The slide detection sensor 3156, which is installed in the unit base 3151 and detects the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and the substantially lower half of the front open portion of the unit base 3151 are closed to close the unit base. A horizontally long flat plate-shaped slide cover 3157 attached to the front end of the 3151, and a rear lower rear relay board 3158 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3151 to relay the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. It has.

The slide guide 3152 of the slide unit 3150 supports the rotation drive unit 3130 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The third drive motor 3155 after the back bottom rotates the drive gear 3154 to rotationally drive the pinion gear 3153a via the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153 meshing with the drive gear 3154, and the pinion gear 3153a. The rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid and moved in the left-right direction by the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130 that meshes with.

Subsequently, the operation of the rear-back movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 103 and 104 (a), the rotation drive unit 3130 is located at the right end of the front view with respect to the left and right slide directions by the slide unit 3150. ing. Further, in a normal state, the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back and the second decorative body 3120 after lowering the back are in a closed state with the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 facing each other, and then after lowering the back. The first decorative surface 3111 (display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first decorative body 3110 is directed forward. In this normal state, the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are located on the right side of the front view with respect to the axis of the hinge rotation extending vertically (decorative body support shaft 3125). doing. Further, in a normal state, the side side of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom, which is rotatably supported by the hinge, is the side surface opposite to the side of the decorative body support shaft 3125. The whole is rotated so as to be located in front of the center of the support shaft 3125. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are rotated by about 20 degrees in the clockwise direction in a plan view.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 103, the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotation drive unit 3130 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3156 of the slide unit 3150. Further, in a normal state, the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132 in the rotation drive unit 3130 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom is in a state where the detection by the first rotation detection sensor 3139 is not detected. It has become. Further, in a normal state, the second detection piece 3128 of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom is detected by the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

Further, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 81 and the like, the first decorative body 3110 after the back is facing the front (front) of the movable decorative body unit 3100 after the back in the assembled state on the game board 5. The first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is located in front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and to the right of the front view, at the lower part of the right corner of the front view within the frame of the center accessory 2500, and is on the player side. The display screen of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 can be visually recognized from the above. Further, in this normal state, as described above, the right side side of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 is located in front of the center of the hinge rotation, and the sub liquid crystal display device. The display screen of 3114 is inclined so as to face the surface of the game panel 1100 toward the vertical line side passing through the center of the game area 5a.

In this normal state, the second drive motor 3137 after the back bottom of the rotary drive unit 3130 passes through the second drive gear 3136, the second decorative body side operating gear 3126, and the decoration support shaft 3125, and the second back bottom rear second. When the second decorative surface 3122 facing the rear of the decorative body 3120 faces the front, and the second decorative surface 3120 is rotated clockwise (160 degrees) in a plan view, it is closed and the lower back is closed. The rear lower rear first decorative body 3110 located in front of the rear second decorative body 3120 is pushed by the rear lower rear second decorative body 3120 and rotates together, and is decorated with "heavenly luck". The second decorative surface 3122 of the rear second decorative body 3120 is in a state of facing the front (see FIG. 104 (b)). Further, the first decorative surface 3111 (sub-liquid crystal display device 3114) of the lower back first decorative body 3110, which was facing the front in the normal state, is in a state of facing the rear and cannot be seen from the player side. From this state, neither the lower back first decorative body 3110 nor the lower back second decorative body 3120 can be further rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view.

In the state of FIG. 104 (b), the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom is in a state of being detected by the first rotation detection sensor 3139, and after the back bottom. The second detection piece 3128 of the decoration support shaft 3125 that rotates integrally with the second decoration 3120 is in a non-detection state with respect to the detection of the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

On the other hand, when the drive gear 3154 is rotationally driven in the front view clockwise direction by the third drive motor 3155 after the back bottom of the slide unit 3150, the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, the pinion gear 3153a, and the rack gear of the rack member 3143 The rotation drive unit 3130 can be slid to the position at the left end of the front view together with the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 via 3143a. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, when the rotation drive unit 3130 is slid to the position of the left end in the front view, the axis line extending up and down the hinge rotation (center line of the decorative body support shaft 3125) is It substantially coincides with the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction.

FIG. 104 (c) shows a state in which the state shown in FIG. 104 (b) is slid and moved to the position at the left end of the front view. Further, FIG. 105 (d) shows the first drive gear 3133 and the rotation transmission member by moving the position to the left end position in the front view in the state of FIG. 104 (a) and driving the first drive motor 3134 after lowering the back. The first decorative body after the back is rotated by a predetermined angle (20 degrees) in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c and the connecting portion 3132b of the 3132. The first decorative surface 3111 (sub-liquid crystal display device 3114) of the 3110 is facing directly in front of the user, or the first decorative surface 3110 after the back is driven by the first drive motor 3134 after the back from the state shown in FIG. 104 (c). By rotating 180 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back is rotated together with the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back, and the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back is rotated. It shows a state in which one decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is directed directly in front of the surface.

Subsequently, in the state of FIG. 104 (c), the second lower back rear decorative body 3120 is rotated 180 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by driving the second lower back rear drive motor 3137, or FIG. 105. In the state of (d), when the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back is rotated 180 degrees in the clockwise direction in a plan view by driving the first driving motor 3134 after lowering the back, as shown in FIG. 105 (e). , The second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are folded facing each other, and then the hinge is rotated to rotate the back bottom. The first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 are opened after the lower back, and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are arranged side by side and face the front.

In the state of FIG. 105 (e), the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back and the first decorative body after lower back 3110 and the second decorative body 310 after lower back are compared with the case where the first decorative body 3110 after lower back and the second decorative body 310 after lower back are overlapped with each other and closed. By arranging the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back second decorative body 3120 side by side, the decorative surface formed by the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 can be formed. The size is doubled, and it can be made to stand out in the game area 5a to strongly attract the player's attention, and the appearance of a large decoration can surprise the player. Further, in the state of FIG. 105 (e), the decorations of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are integrated, and the characters "holy" are written. The decoration becomes visible. The first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 have the first decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122. The decoration corresponding to the decorated decoration is given, and when the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are opened, the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are opened. Can be made inconspicuous, and the character "holy" can be visually recognized by the player in good condition.

As shown in the figure, the one-piece decoration formed by the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 includes "holy" on top of "holy". A cutout decoration 3170 such as "1" is formed. This cutout decoration 3170 is a decoration made by cutting out a part of one character or a pattern, and on the upper side of the cutout decoration 3170, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, which will be described later, is the back upper left first decorative body 3210. When the cut-out decoration 3260, in which the decoration of the fixed decorative member 3211 and the decoration of the second decorative member 3222 of the second decorative body 3220 on the back side are lined up side by side, the entire character of "sparrow" is completed. Yes (see Figure 134).

As described above, according to the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back-bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back-bottom rear second decorative body 3120 are closed by superimposing their surfaces on each other. When the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are opened side by side, the decorative surface of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom is enlarged (expanded) in the front view game area 5a. ), And the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which were closed and could not be seen from the player side, are opened so that they can be seen from the player side. More specifically, the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back is directed forward. In this state (see FIG. 105 (d)), when the first decorative body after the back bottom is rotated and arranged on the left side of the front view of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom, the first decorative body after the back bottom is initially displayed. The decorative area, which was only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110, becomes two, the first decorative surface 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative surface 3112, 3122 of the second decorative surface 3120 after the back bottom so as to extend to the left. The area of decoration is doubled, and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which were previously invisible, can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 105 (e)). Alternatively, in a state where the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are closed and the first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom faces forward (FIG. 104 (c)). (Refer to), when the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back is rotated and arranged on the right side of the front view of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back, initially only the first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back is used. The decorative area is doubled as the second decorative surface 3112 and 3122 of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 so that the existing decorative area extends to the right. At the same time, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which have not been seen so far, can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 105 (e)). In this way, by opening the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 from the closed state, the decorative range by the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120. Since it is possible to expand and change the decoration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the player's interest is focused on the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body 3120 after the back. It is possible to attract strongly and entertain the decoration spread by the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body 3120 after the back, and at the same time, make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, in a state where the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are overlapped with each other and closed, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are put together. When rotated to, the hinges of the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back and the second decorative body 3120 after lower back rotate around the side extending vertically on one side that is rotatably attached. When the surface (back surface) facing backward in this state is rotated so as to face forward, the entire positions of the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back and the second decorative body 3120 after lower back move the central axis of hinge rotation. It will move to the opposite position by sandwiching it. More specifically, the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back is directed forward. In this state (see FIGS. 104 (a) and 105 (d)), when the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are rotated together, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 is rotated. The entire 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 move to the left in the front view, and the first decorative surface 3121 of the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is in a state of facing forward (FIGS. 104 (b) and FIG. (C). On the other hand, in a state where the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back are closed and the first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back faces forward (FIG. 104 (b)). And (c)), when the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are rotated together, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 The whole moves to the right in the front view, and the first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 is in a state of facing forward (see FIGS. 104 (a) and 105 (d)). As a result, the area of decoration by the lower back first decorative body 3110 or the lower back second decorative body 3120 in the front view game area 5a can be moved, and the decoration visible from the player side can be changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back-lower rear second decorative body 3120, and the back-lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back-lower rear second decorative body 3120. It is possible to entertain the movements and decorations of the 3120 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in a state in which the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are overlapped with each other and closed, one of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 or the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is placed. When the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are rotated together to open by rotating, in any case, the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body after the back bottom are the first. (Ii) Since the surface of the decorative body 3120 that can be seen from the player side starts to rotate, at the beginning of the rotation, the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom open. It is difficult to understand whether they rotate together, and it is possible to excite the player by which action to perform, and it is possible to raise the expectation of the player. Further, with respect to the decoration that can be visually recognized in the initial state, the player can see that the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are opened and rotated together. Since the change in the decoration that can be seen from the side is different, the player can enjoy the change in the decoration in various patterns, and the player can not get bored by various effects.

As described above, the lower back movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment is first decorated differently by rotating the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 by hinges. The decorative surfaces 3111, 3121 or the second decorative surfaces 3112, 3122 can be turned to the front, and the slide unit 3150 slides the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body 3120 after the back to the left and right. It is possible to present a variety of effects to the player.

Further, in the lower back movable effect unit 3100, the hinge rotation is performed on one side (the position eccentric from the center of gravity) of the two sides extending vertically in the outer shape of the square in the second lower back decorative body 3120. The upper end and the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward coaxially with the axis can be rotated by the upper bearing 3131c and the lower bearing 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131 in the rotary drive unit 3130, respectively. It supports it, and it supports it rotatably in two places, which are as far apart as possible. Therefore, the decorative body support shaft 3125 protrudes from a position eccentric with respect to the center of gravity of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120, so that the decorative body support shaft 3125 is above the decorative body support shaft 3125. Even if an eccentric load that attempts to tilt the decorative body support shaft 3125 acts due to the weight of the attached back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120, the decorative body support shaft 3125 is difficult to tilt. The decorative body support shaft 3125 can be supported in a straight line, and the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower back rear second decorative body 3120 can be rotated. In other words, since the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward are rotatably supported by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131, the decorative body Since the support shaft 3125 is difficult to tilt, the heavy back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and back lower rear second decorative body 3120, which are rotatably attached to each other, can be placed coaxially with the axis of the hinge rotation. It can be rotatably supported without problems.

[5-9d. Back top left movable production unit]
Next, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up left movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up left movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view showing the back-up left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 109 (b) shows the back-up left first decorative body and the back-up left second decorative body in the back-up left movable effect unit. It is a front view showing the state moved to the position of the right end of the front view, and (c) shows the state where the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body are expanded from the state of (b). It is a front view.

The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the left end in the front view to the vicinity of the center. The back-up left movable production unit 3200 extends up and down the front-view of the back-top left first decorative body 3210 and the back-top left first decorative body 3210, which have a square front-view shape and a predetermined decoration on the front surface. Mounted above the back top left second decoration 3220 and the back top left first decoration 3210, which are hinged rotatably mounted on the right side and have different decorations on the two facing sides. The rotary drive unit 3230 that hinges and drives the back upper left second decorative body 3220, and the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are slid to the left and right together with the rotary drive unit 3230. It is provided with a slide unit 3240 that can be mounted inside the back box 3010.

The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a flat plate-shaped fixed decorative member 3211 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and having translucency, and a front end of the fixed decorative member 3211 on the right side of the front view. It covers the entire rear surface of the fixed decorative member 3211 and the cylindrical first hinge portion 3212, which protrudes outward from the side and is coaxially attached to the axis extending vertically and vertically. The first decorative body base 3213, which is attached to the rear side of the fixed decorative member 3211 and projects upward from the fixed decorative member 3211, is attached between the first decorative body base 3213 and the fixed decorative member 3211. From the left end of the first decorative base 3213, which is connected to the upper surface of the first decorative base 3213 and the back upper left first decorative substrate 3214 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and has an L-shaped side view. The connecting portion 3215 extending to a position to the right of the right end, the rack gear 3216 formed at the upper end of the connecting portion 3215 and extending to the left and right, and the connecting portion 3215 extending forward from the vicinity of the left end in the front view. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3217.

The fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is formed in a slightly vertically long quadrangle in a front view. The length of the side extending to the left and right of the fixed decorative member 3211 is the side extending to the left and right of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110, and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120. It has the same length, and the length of the side extending vertically is shorter than the length of the side extending vertically of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom. The fixed decorative member 3211 is formed with a decoration on which the left half of the character "sparrow" is applied. As shown in FIG. 109 (c), in the present embodiment, the character "sparrow" is cut off from the upper side to the lower side of the lowermost "one" part.

The three first hinge portions 3212 are provided at both upper and lower ends of the fixed decorative member 3211 and at positions upward from the center in the vertical direction. Further, the three first hinge portions 3212 project to the right and forward from the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 in the front view. The rotation drive unit 3230 is attached to the front surface of the portion of the first decorative body base 3213 that protrudes upward from the fixed decorative member 3211. A slider 3243 of the slide unit 3240 is attached to the connecting portion 3215 on the rear surface of a portion extending vertically in an L-shape in a side view. The rack gear 3216 meshes with the pinion gear 3248 of the slide unit 3240.

The back-up left first decorative body 3210 can illuminate and decorate the fixed decorative member 3211 by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the back-up left first decorative substrate 3214.

The back top left movable effect unit 3200 has a translucent first decorative member 3221 having a square outer shape and a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and the back surface of the first decorative member 3221. The second decorative member 3222, which is attached to the first decorative member 3221 and has a translucent decoration on the surface facing back to the surface of the first decorative member 3221, and the left and right sides of the first decorative member 3221. Two second hinges 3223 and two hinges rotatably attached to the first hinge 3212 of the upper left first decorative body 3210, which protrude outward from one of the vertically extending sides. A shaft portion 3224 extending upward from the upper second hinge portion 3223 of the second hinge portion 3223, a spur gear-shaped operating gear 3225 attached to the upper end of the shaft portion 3224, and a first decorative member. It is provided with a back-up left second decorative substrate (not shown), which is attached between the 3221 and the second decorative member 3222 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides.

The first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is formed with a decoration having the characters "Dokun" on its surface. The second decorative member 3222 is formed with a decoration in which the right half of the character "sparrow" is applied to the surface and the back surface of the first decorative member 3221. The second decorative member 3222 can be recognized as the character of "sparrow" by being located on the left side of the fixed decorative member 3211 of the first decorative body 3210 on the back upper left when viewed from the front. Specifically, the decoration by the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 is a cutout decoration 3260 in which the lowermost part "one" is cut off from the upper side with respect to the character "sparrow". On the lower side, the decorations (cutout decorations) of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 in the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are located. By doing so, the character "sparrow" is completed. Since the cutout decoration 3260 on the back upper left movable production unit 3200 side occupies most of the characters of "sparrow", it can be recognized as the character of "sparrow" even if the lower part is cut out.

The two second hinge portions 3223 project to the right and rearward from the right side of the first decorative member 3221 with the surface of the first decorative member 3221 facing the front. Further, the two second hinge portions 3223 are vertically separated from each other, and are provided at positions closer to the center from both upper and lower ends of the first decorative member 3221. The shaft portion 3224 is rotatably inserted into the uppermost first hinge portion 3212 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The operating gear 3225 is attached so as to rotate integrally with the first decorative member 3211 via the shaft portion 3224 and the upper second hinge portion 3223. The operating gear 3225 meshes with the transmission gear 3233 of the rotary drive unit 3230.

The back top left second decorative body 3220 can lightly decorate the first decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 by appropriately emitting an LED mounted on the back top left first decorative substrate (not shown). ..

The rotation drive unit 3230 of the back top left movable effect unit 3200 creates a space between the rotation drive base 3231 attached to the front surface of the first decoration base 3213 of the back top left first decoration 3210 and the rotation drive base 3231. A rotary drive cover 3232 formed and mounted on the upper side of the rotary drive base 3231, and a working gear 3225 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 which is rotatably mounted between the rotary drive cover 3232 and the rotary drive base 3231. A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3233 that meshes, a drive gear that meshes with the transmission gear 3233 (not shown), and a back-up left first drive motor that rotates and drives the drive gear and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotary drive cover 3232. It includes a 3235, a rotation detection sensor (not shown) attached between the rotation drive base 3231 and the rotation drive cover 3232 and detecting the rotation position of the drive gear.

The rotary drive base 3231 of the rotary drive unit 3230 is attached to a position above the fixed decorative member 3211 in the first decorative body base 3213 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The drive gear (not shown) is provided with a detection piece extending outward, and by detecting this detection piece with a rotation detection sensor, the rotation position of the drive gear is detected, and the drive gear, transmission gear 3233, And the rotation position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 can be detected via the operating gear 3225.

The rotary drive unit 3230 rotates the back upper left first drive motor 3235 to rotate the back upper left second decorative body 3220 via the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233, and the operating gear 3225. Can be done.

The slide unit 3240 of the back-up left movable production unit 3200 is slidably attached to the horizontally long unit base 3241 mounted in the back box 3010, the horizontally long slide rail 3242 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3241, and the slide rail 3242. A base cover 3244 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3241 so as to form a space between the slider 3243 to which the connection portion 3215 of the upper left first decorative body 3210 is attached to the front surface and the unit base 3241. The back upper left second drive motor 3245 and the back upper left second drive mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3244 so that the rotating shaft penetrates the base cover 3244 and projects between the base cover 3244 and the unit base 3241. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3246 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3245, a small-diameter first transmission gear 3247a that meshes with the drive gear 3246, and a large-diameter second transmission gear 3247b that rotates integrally with the first transmission gear 3247a. The transmission gear member 3247 rotatably attached between the unit base 3241 and the base cover 3244 has meshed with the second transmission gear 3247b of the transmission gear member 3247, and the back upper left first decorative body 3210. Detects the pinion gear 3248 that meshes with the rack gear 3216 and is rotatably attached between the unit base 3241 and the base cover 3244, and the detection piece 3217 that is attached to the base cover 3244 and is attached to the back upper left first decorative body 3210. It is equipped with a slide detection sensor 3249.

Further, the slide unit 3240 is attached to the left side of the front view on the front surface of the base cover 3244, and includes a back top left first decorative board 3214, a back top left second decorative board, a back top left first drive motor 3235, and a rotation detection sensor. The back upper left second drive motor 3245, the back upper left relay board 3250 relaying the connection between the slide detection sensor 3249 and the effect drive board 3043, and the back upper left relay board 3250 covering the front surface of the base cover 3244. A board cover 3251 attached to the front surface, a back upper left decorative base 3252 attached to the front surface of the board cover 3251, and a back upper left decorative board 3253 attached to the front surface of the back upper left decorative base 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A translucent back upper left decorative body 3254 attached to the front surface of the back upper left decorative base 3252 so as to cover the front of the back upper left decorative substrate 3253 and having a predetermined decoration formed therein.

When the drive gear 3246 is rotationally driven by the back top left second drive motor 3245, the slide unit 3240 backs up the back top left first decorative body 3210 via the transmission gear member 3247, the pinion gear 3248, and the rack gear 3216. It can be slid and moved in the left-right direction together with the left second decorative body 3220 and the rotation drive unit 3230. Further, the back upper left decorative body 3254 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the back upper left decorative substrate 3253.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In a normal state, the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 is back-up so that the front side of the back-up left first decorative body 3210 is covered by the back-up left second decorative body 3220, as shown in FIG. The left second decorative body 3220 is in a state of being folded toward the back upper left first decorative body 3210 side by the rotation drive unit 3230, and the first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 faces the front. It is in a state of being. Further, in a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is located at the left end in the front view by the slide unit 3240. In this normal state, a rotation detection sensor (not shown) detects a detection piece of a drive gear (not shown) for detecting the rotation position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the rotation drive unit 3230. Further, the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3249 of the slide unit 3240.

In the normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are located behind the back left middle decorative unit 3050 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the player side. It is invisible from the above (see FIG. 81 and the like).

In a normal state, when the pinion gear 3248 is rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the drive gear 3246 and the transmission gear member 3247 by the back upper left second drive motor 3245 of the slide unit 3240, the pinion gear When the back upper left first decorative body 3210 slides to the right in the front view together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230 by the rack gear 3216 meshing with the 3248, and reaches the right end. The slide movement stops (see FIG. 109 (b)). In this state, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the hinge-rotatable vertically extending axes of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are centered in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. 3210 is visible from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 133).

Then, in a state where the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is positioned at the right end in the front view by the slide unit 3240, the back upper left first drive motor 3235 of the rotary drive unit 3230 passes through the drive gear and the transmission gear 3233. When the operating gear 3225 is rotated 180 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the back upper left second decorative body 3220 that is folded and covers the front surface of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is unfolded. The hinge is rotated to the right side of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 in the front view (see FIG. 109 (c)). As a result, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are lined up side by side, which makes them about twice as large as the normal state, so that they stand out in the game area 5a. It can attract the player's attention strongly, and the appearance of a large decoration can surprise the player.

In this state, the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged side by side and face the front, and the respective decorations are integrated. Then, the decoration of the character "sparrow" becomes visible. The first hinge portion 3212 and the second hinge portion 3223 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are decorated with the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222. Corresponding decoration is applied, and when the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is opened from the back upper left second decorative body 3220, the first hinge portion 3212 and the second hinge portion 3223 can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to make the character of "sparrow" visible to the player in good condition.

In addition, the decoration of the character "sparrow" that can be visually recognized as a unit is cut off from the position above the "one" part on the bottom side, and the back top left first decoration body 3210 and the back top. To be integrated with the decoration of the second decorative surface 3112, 3122 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 located below the left second decorative body 3220. Then, the character "sparrow" is in perfect condition (see Fig. 134).

In this way, the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 slides the back-up left first decorative body 3210 and the back-up left second decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction, and extends the back-up left second decorative body 3220 up and down. By rotating the hinge around the vertical axis, it can be folded so as to cover the front surface of the back upper left first decorative body 3210, or it can be unfolded so as to line up on the front right side of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. It is possible to present a variety of effects to the player.

[5-9e. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. 110A is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 110B is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 111A is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 111B is a front view showing the back left movable decorative body in the back left movable effect unit in a protruding state.

The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is supported by a back right fixed decorative body 3310 having a three-dimensional predetermined decoration on the front surface and a back right fixed decorative body 3310 slidably supported in the left-right direction behind the back right fixed decorative body 3310. The frame-shaped movable back right decorative body 3320 and the movable back right decorative body 3320 are slid and moved in the left-right direction and mounted in the back box 3010, and the back left fixed decorative body 3310 is mounted on the front surface. It is equipped with a back left drive unit 3330.

The back left fixed decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically long substantially quadrangular shape in front view. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 is attached to the rear surface of the fixed side decorative member 3311 which is three-dimensionally decorated and has translucency, and the fixed side decorative member 3311, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It is provided with a back left fixed decorative substrate 3312. As shown in the figure, the fixed-side decorative member 3311 is partially formed with a “發” tile decoration. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 can illuminate the fixed side decorative member 3311 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back left fixed decorative substrate 3312.

The back left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically long quadrangle having a front view shape substantially the same size as the back left fixed decorative body 3310. The back left movable decorative body 3320 includes a frame-shaped movable side decorative member 3321 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 having transparency attached to the rear surface of the movable side decorative member 3321. And the frame-shaped movable base 3323 attached to the rear side of the decorative frame 3322, and the back left movable decoration attached between the movable base 3323 and the decorative frame 3322 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A substrate 3324 and the like are provided.

The movable side decorative member 3321 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is decorated in the same manner as the first decorative surface 3111 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100. The lower end side of the movable base 3323 protrudes downward from the movable side decorative member 3321 and the decorative frame 3322, and the protruding portion is slidably attached in the left-right direction by the back left drive unit 3330. Although not shown, the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 is formed in a U shape along the portion on the right side of the center in the front left-right direction of the frame-shaped decorative frame 3322. By making the LED of the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 emit light, the movable side decorative member 3321 can be made to emit light.

The back left drive unit 3330 of the back left movable production unit 3300 is mounted on the lower front of the unit base 3331 installed in the back box 3010 and the lower front surface of the unit base 3331 so that the back left movable decoration 3320 can slide in the left-right direction. The slide guide 3332 that extends in the left-right direction is attached, the back left drive motor 3333 that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 so that the rotation shaft extends forward, and the base end side of the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333. A rod-shaped operating arm (not shown) that is attached and the tip side is connected to the back left movable decorative body 3320, and a slide detection sensor 3335 that detects the rotational position of the operating arm and is attached to the unit base 3331. And the back left which is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 and relays the connection between the back left fixed decorative board 3312, the back left movable decorative board 3324, the back left drive motor 3333, and the slide detection sensor 3335 and the effect drive board 3043. It includes a relay board 3336.

In the unit base 3331 of the back left drive unit 3330, the back left fixed decorative body 3310 is attached to the front of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the left end side in the front view. The slide guide 3332 is attached to the lower end portion of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The back left drive motor 3333 is attached to the upper right corner of the unit base 3331 when viewed from the rear. The operating arm (not shown) extends from the base end side attached to the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 to the vicinity of the right end of the lower side of the back left movable decorative body 3320 having a frame-shaped tip end side. Further, although not shown, the operating arm has a slit formed at the tip thereof, which penetrates back and forth and extends in the longitudinal direction thereof. A guide pin projecting rearward from the vicinity of the lower right corner of the rear view of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slidably inserted into the slit.

Subsequently, the operation of the back left movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state of the back left movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310, and is almost invisible from the front. It is in a state of being. That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located in an invisible immersive position. In this normal state, an operating arm (not shown) is detected by the slide detection sensor 3335. Further, in the normal state, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, a part of the right end of the front view of the back left fixed decorative body arranged on the front side faces the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the back left. The portion on the left side of the front view of the front of the fixed decorative body can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached at a position where the back left movable decorative body 3320 is at the same height as the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 as the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear movable decorative body 3120. ing.

In this normal state, when the actuating arm is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back left drive motor 3333, the guide pin of the movable base 3323 slidably inserted into the slit at the tip of the actuating arm is inserted. , The operating arm presses to the right in the front view, and the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides straight to the right in the front view via the slide guide 3332. Then, when the right side portion of the frame-shaped back left fixed decorative body 3320 is located from the rear side of the front view to the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310, the sliding movement to the right stops. As a result, the portion of the frame-shaped back-left movable decorative body 3320 to the right of the left side is located to the right of the back-left fixed decorative body 3310 and can be visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 111 (b)). ). That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at an appearance position that can be visually recognized from the player side.

In the state where the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides to the right and is located at the appearance position, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the player side in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. In addition to being visible, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged rearward through the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 can be visually recognized. Therefore, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, when a predetermined effect image (effect movie) is displayed in the display area directly behind the back left movable decoration body 3320, the player can see the frame of the back left movable decoration body 3320. It is possible to give the illusion that a liquid crystal display device is installed inside. As a result, the player can be illusioned that there are two sub-liquid crystal display devices 3114 on the first decorative surface 3111 in the first decorative body 3110 after the back of the movable effect unit 3100.

[5-9f. Movable production unit on the back]
Next, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 123. FIG. 112 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 112 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 113 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up and middle movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 (b) shows the back-up and middle movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 114 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 117 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive configuration of the back-up middle decorative unit from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in (a). FIG. 118 (a) is a front view of the back-up middle decoration unit in a normal state, and FIG. 118 (b) shows a state in which a pair of back-up middle first decorations of the back-up middle decoration unit are half-opened outward. (C) is a front view showing a pair of back-up middle decoration units of the back-up middle decoration unit in a state of being completely opened to the outside.

Further, FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable production unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 (b) is a rear view of the back upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable production unit. It is a perspective view. FIG. 120 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 120 (b) shows the back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 121 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle rotation unit of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) shows the back-up middle rotation unit of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 122 is an explanatory view schematically showing the drive system of the back-up middle movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 123 (a) is a front view of the back-up middle movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view showing the back-up middle decorative body unit lowered in the back-up middle movable effect unit. ..

The back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from substantially the center to the right end in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 113, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the rear of the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 and the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 which are attached so as to be openable and closable. The back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 having the back upper middle decorative body 3412, the rotary connecting member 3430 attached to the rear surface of the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410, and the rotary connecting member 3430 The back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is mounted so as to be able to move up and down and rotateably, and the back upper middle drive unit 3440 is mounted inside the back box 3010, and the back upper right decoration is mounted on the front of the back upper middle drive unit 3440. It includes a unit 3480 and a back-up middle relay board 3490 attached to the rear surface of the back-up middle drive unit 3440.

As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the back-up middle decorative body unit 3410 of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 is a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and having translucency. 3411 and a pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 and a pair of back-up middle first decorations 3412, which are arranged behind the pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 and have a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a pair of back-up middle first decorations 3412. A pair of translucent flat plate-shaped slide bases 3413 attached to the rear surface of the body 3411 and a pair of slide bases 3413 attached to the rear surface of the pair of slide bases 3413 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The back-up middle first decorative board 3414, the back-up middle second decorative board 3415 mounted on the rear surface of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back-up middle second decorative board 3415, and the back-up middle second decorative board The substrate cover covers the rear surface of the 3415 and forms a space in which the slide base 3413 is slidably accommodated between the substrate cover 3416 attached to the rear surface of the second decorative body 3412 on the back surface and the substrate cover 3416. It includes a flat plate-shaped slider cover 3417 attached to the rear side of the 3416 and a decorative unit base 3418 attached to the rear side of the slider cover 3417.

Further, the back-up middle decorative unit 3410 is attached to the rear surface of the motor base 3419 attached to the rear surface of the decorative unit base 3418 and the rotating shaft protruding from the front surface of the motor base 3419. A spur gear-shaped first drive gear mounted on the rotating shafts of the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 and the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 and arranged between the motor base 3419 and the decorative unit base 3418. The 3421 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3422 that are rotatably attached to the decorative unit base 3418 so as to mesh with the first drive gear 3421 and have the front end projecting forward from the decorative unit base. The first pinion gear 3423, which meshes with the first transmission gear 3422 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the decorative unit base 3418, is provided.

Further, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is a mounting boss that meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends to the left and right, and a mounting boss that penetrates the slider cover 3417 and attaches one of the pair of slide bases 3413. The first slider 3424 which has 3424b and is slidably attached between the slider cover 3417 and the decorative unit base 3418 in the left-right direction and the rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 sandwich the first pinion gear 3423. On the opposite side, it has a rack gear 3425a that meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends to the left and right, and a mounting boss 3425b that penetrates the slider cover 3417 and attaches the rest (the other) of the pair of slide bases 3413. , The second slider 3425 which is slidably attached to the slider cover 3417 and the decorative unit base 3418 in the left-right direction, and the slide position of the second slider 3425 which is attached to the decorative unit base 3418 from the rear side. It is provided with a slide detection sensor 3426 for detecting the above.

The pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 has a front view shape in which one end of a quadrangle extending to the left and right in the longitudinal direction bulges outward in a semi-circular shape. The end side on the opposite side is recessed inward in a semi-circular shape, and the portion recessed in this semi-arc is a recess 3411a. Further, in the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, the outer periphery excluding the end side in which the recess 3411a recessed inward in a semicircular shape is formed extends rearward in a plate shape. The pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are attached so that the ends on which the recesses 3411a are formed face each other. Further, the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are formed in a milky white color having translucency as a whole, and the front surface of one back-up middle first decorative body 3411 is on the head side of the "dragon". The decoration is formed on the front surface of the first decorative body 3411 on the back of the rest (the other) so that the decoration on the tail side of the "dragon" has a metallic luster.

The back-up middle second decorative body 3412 has a flat plate shape extending to the left and right, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the size when the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are combined (closed). Has been done. The back-up middle second decorative body 3412 has a circular central decorative portion 3412a that bulges forward in a circular shape that can be inserted into the recess 3411a of the back-up middle first decorative body 3411 in the center, and the left and right of the central decorative portion 3412a. A circular central horizontal decoration portion 3412b formed on both sides separated from each other vertically and a circular central horizontal decoration portion 3412b formed on both the left and right outer sides of the central horizontal decoration portion 3412b and having the same size as the central horizontal decoration portion 3412b. An intermediate decorative portion 3412c and a circular end decorative portion 3412d having a diameter larger than that of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, which are formed on both the left and right outer sides of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c near the left and right ends, are provided. The second decorative body 3412 on the back surface is formed in a milky white color having translucency as a whole, and the outer periphery of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d on the front surface and the like. A linear decoration having a metallic luster is formed on the surface. The second decorative body 3412 on the back is decorated to remind the player of the "dot stick" of "Mahjong".

The pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a shape substantially corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of the first decorative body 3411 on the back surface, and are rearward around the outer periphery extending to the rear of the first decorative body 3411 on the back surface. It is attached to the end. As a result, by assembling the back-up middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413, the back-up middle first decorative body 3411 is placed between the portion forming the front surface of the back-up middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413. A space is formed in which the second decorative body 3412, the second decorative substrate 3415 on the back surface, and the substrate cover 3416 can be inserted. Further, each of the pair of slide bases 3413 is provided with slits 3413a that penetrate the front and rear and extend to the left and right. Of the pair of slide bases 3413, one slide base 3413 has a slit 3413a formed on the side closer to the upper side, and the remaining slide base 3413 has a slit 3413a formed on the side closer to the lower side. Further, the pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The pair of back-up middle first decorative substrates 3414 and back-up middle second decorative substrates 3415 are substrates having a white surface (entire surface). This makes it easier to reflect and diffuse light and makes the substrate less noticeable. Since the first decorative body 3414 on the back side is attached to the slide base 3413 away from the portion forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411 on the back side, the light from the LED is on the back side. Since the irradiation range of light is widened by the time it reaches the part forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411, it is possible to uniformly illuminate and decorate the entire first decorative body 3411 in the back and middle even if the number of LEDs is small. it can. On the other hand, the back-up middle second decorative substrate 3415 can illuminate the entire back-up middle second decorative body 3412, and also has a central decorative portion 3412a and a central horizontal decorative portion of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412. The 3412b, the intermediate decoration portion 3412c, and the edge decoration portion 3412d can be independently luminescently decorated.

The substrate cover 3416 includes a mounting boss 3416a that projects rearward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the rear surface and is inserted into the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413. The rear end of the mounting boss 3416a of the board cover 3416 that penetrates the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413 is mounted on the slider cover 3417. Further, the mounting boss 3416a of the substrate cover 3416 slides relatively in the left-right direction in the slit 3413a via the bush 3427 that is rotatably mounted. The substrate cover 3416 is transparent.

The slider cover 3417 penetrates back and forth and extends left and right, and the first slit 3417a through which the mounting boss 3424a of the first slider 3424 is slidably inserted and the first slit 3417a penetrates back and forth and extends left and right. It is provided with a second slit 3417b through which the mounting boss 3425a of the second slider 3425 is slidably inserted. The first slit 3417a is formed near the lower side on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. The second slit 3417b is formed near the upper side on the right side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

The first pinion gear 3423 is arranged slightly to the right from the center in the left-right direction in the front view (see FIG. 117). The first slider 3424 is arranged so that the rack gear 3424a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from below, and two mounting bosses 3424b arranged horizontally from the left end in the front view project forward. The two mounting bosses 3424b of the first slider 3424 have a front end that penetrates the first slit 3417a of the slider cover 3417 and protrudes forward, and is decorated on the head side of the "dragon". It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to the body 3411. The second slider 3425 is arranged so that the rack gear 3425a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from above, and two mounting bosses 3425b arranged horizontally from the right end in the front view project forward. The two mounting bosses 3425b of the second slider 3425 have a front end that penetrates the second slit 3417b of the slider cover 3417 and protrudes forward, and is decorated on the tail side of the "dragon". It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to 3411. Further, the second slider 3425 includes a detection piece 3425c that projects upward in a flat plate shape from the upper part near the right end in the front view. The detection piece 3425c is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 in the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. In a normal state, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is closed with the ends of the pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 on the recess 3411a side in contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 118 (a) and the like. There is. In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 bulges forward through the circular opening formed by the concave portion 3411a, and the other parts of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are from the front. Not visible.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the left end of the front view of the first slider 3424 and the right end of the front view of the second slider 2425 are in the left-right direction in the back-up middle decoration unit 3410. It is located near the center. Further, the detection piece 3425c of the second slider 3425 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426. In the normal state (closed state), when the central decorative portion 3412a is light-emittingly decorated by the second decorative substrate 3415 on the back side, the player can be shown the decoration reminiscent of the "thousand-point stick" of "Mahjong". Further, in a normal state, when the entire back-up middle second decorative body 3412 is light-emittingly decorated by the back-up middle second decorative substrate 3415, the back-up middle first decoration covering the front of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 is covered. The body 3411 can be luminescently decorated as a whole. Further, when the LED of the first decorative body 3414 on the back surface is made to emit light under a normal state, the light is formed on the rear surface of the second decorative body 3415 on the back surface, and the first decorative body 3414 on the back surface is formed in white. It can be reflected and diffused on the front surface, etc., and the outer periphery of the first decorative body 3411, etc.

When the first pinion gear 3423 is rotationally driven in the front-view clockwise direction by the first drive motor 3420 on the back side from the normal state via the first drive gear 3421 and the first transmission gear 3422, the first The rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 and the rack gear 3425a of the second slider 3425 that mesh with the pinion gear 3423 slide the first slider 3424 to the left in the front view and the second slider 3425 to the right in the front view. Slide to move. As a result, the first decorative body 3411 on the back side, which is decorated on the head side of the "dragon" attached via the mounting boss 3424b of the first slider 3424, slides to the left in the front view, and at the same time, the first decorative body 3411 slides to the left. The first decorative body 3411 on the back side, which is decorated on the tail side of the "dragon" mounted via the mounting boss 3425b of the two sliders 3425, slides to the right in the front view, and a pair of back top middle parts. The first decorative body 3411 slides open in a direction away from each other.

When the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid away from each other, the back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are moved from between the ends of the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 on the recessed 3411a side. A part of the second decorative body 3412 on the back side, which is arranged behind the 3411, faces forward. Then, in a state where the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 faces forward from between the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411, the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 Temporarily stop the rotational drive of. In this state (intermediate open state), as shown in FIG. 117 (b), from between the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 to the central decorative portion 3412a of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 and four. The central horizontal decoration portion 3412b is in a state of facing forward. In this state, if the central decorative portion 3412a and the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b are light-emittingly decorated by the second decorative substrate 3415 on the back, the player can be shown a decoration reminiscent of the "5,000-point stick" of "Mahjong". it can.

From this state, when the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid and moved in the direction of being separated from each other by the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 and the rotational drive is stopped in the most separated state, FIG. 118 (Fig. 118). As shown in c), substantially the entire back-up middle second decorative body 3412 faces forward from between the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 (fully open state). In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 all face forward, and the back upper middle second decorative substrate When the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d are luminescently decorated by the 3415, the player can be shown a decoration reminiscent of the "mahjong" "man-point stick". it can. Further, in this state, the back-up middle first decorative substrate 3414 and the back-up middle second decorative substrate 3415 make the back-up middle first decorative substrate 3411 and the back-up middle second decorative substrate 3412 luminescent as a whole. be able to.

Subsequently, the rotary connection member 3430 of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the center in the longitudinal direction on the rear surface of the decoration unit base 3418 in the back-up middle decoration unit 3410, and is attached to the back of the back-up middle drive unit 3440. It includes a connection base 3431 attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467 in the medium rotation unit 3460, and a cylindrical connection bush 3432 rotatably attached to the connection base 3431. The outer peripheral surface of the connecting bush 3432 is inserted into the insertion hole 3461b of the rotating unit base 3461 in the back-up middle rotating unit 3460.

Next, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 of the back-up middle movable production unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120 and the like, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 can rotate the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 on the front side to mount the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 so as to be rotatable. The unit base 3441 attached to the back box 3010, the base cover 3442 attached to the unit base 3441 so as to cover the front of the unit base 3441 in front of the back upper middle rotation unit 3460, and the base cover. The flat second drive motor 3443 attached to the front surface of the 3442 and the rotating shaft penetrating the base cover 3442 and projecting rearward, and the flat second drive motor 3443 attached to the upper middle second drive motor 3443. A gear-shaped second drive gear 3444, a large-diameter spur gear-shaped large-diameter transmission gear 3445a that meshes with the second drive gear 3444, and a small-diameter spur gear-shaped small-diameter transmission gear that rotates integrally with the large-diameter transmission gear 3445a. A spur gear-shaped gear portion 3446a and a gear portion 3446a which have 3445b and mesh with the second transmission gear 3445 which is rotatably attached to the base cover 3442 and the small diameter transmission gear 3445b of the second transmission gear 3445. It has a columnar drive pin 3446b projecting rearward from the rear surface, and the elevating drive gear 3446 rotatably attached to the base cover 3442 and the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 are inserted and rearward. It has an arcuate slit 3447a protruding from the base, and is attached to the rear surface of the base cover 3442 so as to cover the rear side of the second drive gear 3444, the second transmission gear 3445, and the elevating drive gear 3446, and the base. It includes a second drive gear 3444, a second transmission gear 3445, and a flat plate-shaped gear cover 3447 that rotatably attaches the elevating drive gear 3446 in cooperation with the cover 3442.

Further, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 is attached to the unit base 3441 and has a rotation detection sensor 3448 that detects the rotation position of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460, and the unit base 3441 and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. The assist spring 3449, which is attached between them and urges the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 in the direction in which the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 rises, and the entire band-shaped structure that penetrates back and forth and extends in the longitudinal direction. It has an assist slit 3450a, and the assist arm 3450, whose base end side is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3441, and the assist arm 3450 are rotatably pressed from the front toward the unit base 3441 side. It is provided with an arm retainer 3451 attached to the front surface of the.

As shown in FIG. 121 and the like, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440 has a bearing portion 3461a rotatably attached to the unit base 3441, and a long hole extending in a predetermined direction through the front and rear. A drive slit 3461b into which the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 is slidably inserted, an insertion hole 3461c into which the connection bush 3432 of the rotary connecting member 3430 is inserted, and an assist slit of the assist arm 3450 protruding rearward. It has a columnar assist pin 3461d that is inserted into the 3450a, and rotates so as to close the shallow box-shaped rotating unit base 3461 with the rear open and the open rear side of the rotating unit base 3461. It includes a rear cover 3462 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3461.

Further, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 includes a back-up middle third drive motor 3436 mounted on the front surface of the rotation unit base 3461 so that the rotation shaft projects between the rear cover 3462 and the rotation unit base 3461. The spur gear-shaped third drive gear 3464 attached to the rotating shaft of the third drive motor 3464 on the back is meshed with the third drive gear 3464 and can be rotated by the rotating unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. A rod-shaped transmission rack gear that meshes with the mounted spur gear-shaped drive pinion gear 3465 and is slidably mounted in a predetermined direction between the rotating unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. The 3466 and the transmission rack gear 3466 are meshed with each other and are rotatably attached by the rotating unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462 at a position coaxial with the insertion hole 3461c of the rotating unit base 3461. It includes a spur gear-shaped driven pinion gear 3467 to which the rear end of the base 3431 is attached.

Further, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 detects the rotation position of the driven pinion gear 3467, and the rotation detection sensor 3468 attached to the rotation unit base 3461 and the assist pin 3461d of the rotation unit base 3461 are inserted inside. The outer side is slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450, and the bush 3469 is attached to the rear end of the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 and the bush 3469 is pulled out from the assist pin 3461d. It is provided with a retaining cap 3470 to prevent the above.

The unit base 3441 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440 is formed in a shape in which the upper part of the left side of the front view of a quadrangle extending vertically protrudes to the left, and protrudes forward from the front of the lower part to rotate in the back-up middle. A rotation support pin 3441a for rotatably attaching the unit 3460 is provided. The rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted into the bearing portion 3461a of the rotation unit base 3461 in the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. A rotation detection sensor 3448 is attached to the unit base 3441 at the upper end of the front surface near the right end of the front view, and an assist arm 3450 is attached near the left end of the front view.

The back-up second drive motor 3436 is attached near the upper end portion on the front surface of the base cover 3442. The rotary drive of the back-up second drive motor 3464 is transmitted via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445. The elevating drive gear 3446 is located at a substantially central position in the vertical direction of the unit base 3441 and the base cover 3442. It is mounted rotatably with (see FIG. 122).

The assist spring 3449 is a coiled torsion spring, and is attached so as to surround the outer circumference of the rotation support pin 3441a in the unit base 3441. The assist arm 3450 can be rotated on the same surface without rattling by being pressed against the unit base 3441 by the arm retainer 3451.

The rotation unit base 3461 of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 extends to the left and right, and a bearing portion 3461a into which the rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted is formed in the lower right corner of the front view. The bearing portion 3461a is formed of a metal bearing. The drive slit 3461b of the rotating unit base 3461 is formed above the bearing portion 3461a and extends vertically. The insertion hole 3461c of the rotating unit base 3461 is formed near the left end in the front view. The rotation unit base 3461 extends to the left and right along the lower side longer than the transmission rack gear 3466, and has a slide groove 3461e that slidably accommodates the transmission rack gear 3466, and a rotation detection It includes a detection piece 3461f detected by a sensor.

The third drive motor 3464 in the back surface is mounted substantially in the center between the bearing portion 3461a and the insertion hole 3461c in the rotating unit base 3461. In the driven pinion gear 3467, the outer gear teeth that mesh with the transmission rack gear 3466 are formed only within a range of about 3/4 of the entire circumference, and the driven pinion gear 3467 does not make one rotation. The driven pinion gear 3467 includes a fan-shaped detection piece 3467a extending outward from a portion of the outer circumference where gear teeth are not formed, and the detection piece 3467a is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468.

Next, the back upper right decorative unit 3480 of the back upper middle movable production unit 3400 will be described. The back upper right decorative unit 3480 is attached to the front surface of the decorative base 3481 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3442 and the front surface of the decorative base 3481 at a position in front of the back upper middle second drive motor 3443 in the back upper middle drive unit 3440. A back upper right decorative board 3482 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a translucent back upper right decorative board 3843 arranged in front of the back upper right decorative board 3482 and attached to the front of the decorative base 3481. , Is equipped.

The back upper right decorative unit 3480 can illuminate the back upper right decorative body 3483 by emitting the LED of the back upper right decorative substrate 3482. The back upper right decorative body 3483 of the back upper right decorative unit 3480 is assembled on the game board 5 and has a general prize with the gate portion 2003 in the right-handed distribution space 2541 in the front-view right-handed game area 2540 of the center accessory 2500. It is located between the mouth 2001, and the inside of the upper right distribution space 2541 can be luminescent and decorated from behind through the transparent game panel 1100.

The back-up middle relay board 3490 of the back-up middle movable production unit 3400 is the back-up middle first decorative board 3414, the back-up middle second decorative board 3415, the back-up middle first drive motor 3420, the slide detection sensor 3426, and the back-up. The middle second drive motor 3443, the rotation detection sensor 3448, the back upper middle third drive motor 3464, the rotation detection sensor 3468, the back upper right decorative board 3482, and the effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510. Is connected.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described together with the operation of the back-up middle drive unit 3440. In the normal state, the back-up middle decoration unit 3400 has the upper side of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 extended to the left and right so that the longitudinal direction is horizontal, as shown in FIG. 123 (a). It is located slightly below the upper side of the unit base 3441 in the back-up middle drive unit 3440. In this normal state, a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are in contact with each other and closed.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 122, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is located at the upper rotation end, and the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 is the drive slit 3461b of the rotation unit base 3461. It is located at the lower end of the inside. In this state, a rotational moment that attempts to rotate the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with the rotation support pin 3441a as the center acts due to the weight of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 or the like. ing. Due to this rotational moment, the drive pin 3446b is pressed to the left side via the drive slit 3461b. Then, when the drive pin 3446b is pressed, the elevating drive gear 3446 tries to rotate, but the drive pin 3446b passes through the rotation center of the elevating drive gear 3446 and is orthogonal to the extending direction of the drive slit 3461b. Since it is located below, the elevating drive gear 3446 tends to rotate in the front-view clockwise direction. However, since the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 is in contact with the lower end of the drive slit 3461b, the elevating drive gear 3446 cannot rotate in the clockwise direction any more, and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. Is maintained in the normal state, and the decorative body unit 3410 is locked in the raised state. Further, in this state, since the elevating drive gear 3446 does not rotate despite the action of the rotational moment, a load is applied to the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 via the second transmission gear 3445 and the second drive gear 3444. The back-up middle decoration unit 3410 can be maintained at the rising end even when the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 is not energized.

Further, in a normal state, the transmission rack gear 3466 slidably supported by the slide groove 3461e of the rotary unit base 3461 is located at the moving end away from the rotary support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a). The driven pinion gear 3467 that meshes with the transmission rack gear 3466 is rotationally positioned near the rotational end in the clockwise direction in front view. Further, in a normal state, the center of the insertion hole 3461c (driven pinion gear 3467) of the rotation unit base 3461 of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is located above the center of the bearing hole 3461a (rotation support pin 3441a). ing. Further, in a normal state, the assist arm 3450 extends horizontally, and the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450 is a base in the assist slit 3450a. It is located near the end on the end side.

Further, in the normal state, the detection piece 3461f of the rotation unit base 3461 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3448, and the detection piece 3467a of the driven pinion gear 3467 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468. Further, in a normal state, a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 that extend and close horizontally in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 are the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the frame of the front view center accessory 2500. It is located above the display screen of the player so that it can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 81 and the like).

From this normal state, when the elevating drive gear 3446 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 by the second drive motor 3443 in the back and forth, the elevating and lowering gears are raised and lowered. The drive pin 3446b of the drive gear 3446 revolves in the counterclockwise direction so as to rise in the drive slit 3461b. When the drive pin 3446b revolves in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the drive pin 3446b presses the inside of the drive slit 3461b to the left, and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is rotationally supported via the drive slit 3461b. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with the pin 3441a as the center.

When the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the insertion hole of the rotation unit base 3461 located above the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a) and on the left side in the front view. The 3461c (driven pinion gear 3467) side moves downward. As a result, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 attached to the driven pinion gear 3467 is lowered via the rotation connection member 3430 through the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461. At this time, the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 revolves in the counterclockwise direction in the front view around the rotation support pin 3441a, so that the assist pin 3461d causes the assist arm 3450 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the front view. As it rotates, the assist pin 3461d slides in the assist slit 3450a toward the tip end side thereof.

Then, when the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 rotates about 41 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the normal state, the rotation drive of the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 stops, and the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461c. (The driven pinion gear 3467) is located below the rotation support pin 3441a, and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is located at the lower end (see FIG. 123 (b)). In this state, a part of the rotating unit base 3461 is in contact with the unit base 3441, and the assist pin 3461d is in contact with the end portion on the tip side in the assist slit 3450a. The rotation is restricted.

In the state where the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end, the back upper middle decoration is assembled on the game board 5. The center of the body unit 3410 (the central decorative portion 3412a of the second decorative body 3412 in the upper back) is located substantially in the center within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 137).

With the decorative body unit 3410 on the back upper side moved to the lower end, the drive pinion gear 3465 is rotationally driven by the third drive motor 3464 on the back side via the third drive gear 3464 in the clockwise direction of the front view. Then, the transmission rack gear 3466 meshing with the drive pinion gear 3465 slides to the right in the front view in the slide groove 3461e. When the transmission rack gear 3466 slides to the right, the driven pinion gear 3467 that meshes with the transmission rack gear 3466 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and is a rotary connection attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467. The back-up middle decoration unit 3410 also rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the connection base 3431 of the member 3430.

In the back-up middle rotation unit 3460, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view until the transmission rack gear 3466 reaches the right end of the front view of the slide groove 3461e. In the present embodiment, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated by about 193 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state. Therefore, in the state where the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end, it can be rotated by 208 degrees in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the normal state in which it extends horizontally (FIG. 123 (FIG. 123). b)). Then, in the state of FIG. 123 (b), the back-up middle first decorative body 3410 is driven to drive the back-up middle first decorative body 3410, and the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid in the directions away from each other. Move (see FIGS. 138 and 139, etc.).

As described above, the back-up middle movable production unit 3400 has the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 having the pair of back-up middle first decoration body 3411 and the back-up middle second decoration body 3412, and the back-up middle decoration unit 3440. In addition to being able to move up and down and rotate, the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 can be opened and closed, and a variety of movable effects can be presented to the player. In addition, depending on the degree of opening of the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411, the "mahjong" represented by the decoration of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 facing forward from between the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies. Since the score of the "point stick" can be changed, the player's expectation for the game can be increased by the score of the "point stick".

[5-9 g. Back bottom front movable production unit]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 131. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back front movable effect unit disassembled except for the back lower front decorative body unit, and FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back front movable effect unit disassembled except for the back lower front decorative body unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 shows the back lower front decorative unit of the back lower front movable production unit disassembled. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 129 is a front view schematically showing the decorative body unit elevating mechanism in the lower back front movable effect unit. FIG. 130 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the state of the decorative body unit elevating mechanism when the lower back front decorative body unit is raised, and FIG. 130 (b) is an enlarged portion of the unit elevating pin in (a). (C) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the unit elevating pin and the elevating slit by further enlarging (b). FIG. 131 (a) is a front view showing the lower back front movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (a). (C) is a front view showing a state in which the back lower front first decorative body of the back lower front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (b).

The lower back front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is an elevating unit that is attached to the front surface of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 and the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 that are provided with predetermined decorations and is attached to the front surface of the back lower front movable effect unit 3100. The 3502, the lower left decorative unit 3503 attached to the front of the left end of the elevating unit 3502, and the lower middle decorative unit 3504 attached to the left from the center of the elevating unit 3502 in the left-right direction of the front view. The back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 attached to the front of the elevating unit 3502 from the left side to the lower side of the back lower middle decoration unit 3504, and the back lower front relay board 3506 attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit 3502. It has.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the back bottom front decorative body unit 3501 of the back bottom front movable production unit 3500 is a plate-shaped extending left and right and has different decorations on both sides. The body 3510 and the first decorative body 3510 under the back are rotatably attached to the upper side extending to the left and right, and are attached to the elevating unit 3502 so as to be able to move up and down. It is provided with a second decorative body 3520.

The back bottom front first decoration body 3510 of the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is a shallow box-shaped transparent body in which the shape of the front view is a quadrangle extending long to the left and right, a predetermined decoration is formed on the front side, and the rear side is open. It is attached to the rear surface of the first table decorative member 3511 having light and a predetermined decoration is formed on the rear surface of the first table decorative member 3511, and has a shallow box shape with the front side open and has translucency. The first back decorative member 3512, the lower back front first decorative substrate 3513 mounted between the first back decorative member 3512 and the first front decorative member 3511 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides, and the first One back decoration member 3512 has two cylindrical first hinge portions 3514 protruding diagonally upward and rearward so as to be coaxial with the axis extending from the left and right ends of the front view to the left and right, and the first back decoration. The decorative body elevating pin 3515 which protrudes from the right side surface of the member 3512 to the right in a columnar shape and is slidably inserted into the slit 3533a of the decorative body elevating arm 3533 in the lower back front second decorative body 3520 described later. And a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3516 projecting rearward from the right side of the front view of the first back decoration member 3512.

In the lower back front first decorative body 3510, of the two first hinge portions 3514, the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side in the front view is attached slightly to the left of the right end in the front view of the first back decorative member 3512. ing. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3511 is decorated with a plurality of "mahjong" tiles lined up on the left and right.

The back lower front second decorative body 3520 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is formed to be larger on the left and right and upper and lower than the back lower front first decorative body 3510, and a predetermined decoration is formed on the front side so that the rear side is formed. A shallow, open, box-shaped, translucent second decorative member 3521, and a lower front second decorative substrate 3522, which is attached to the rear surface of the second decorative member 3521 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Front view of the flat plate-shaped substrate cover 3523 attached to the rear side of the second decorative member 3521, which covers the rear of the lower front second decorative substrate 3522, and the upper side extending to the left and right of the second decorative member 3521. It protrudes diagonally upward and forward so as to be coaxial with the axis extending from the vicinity of both left and right ends to the left and right, and has a cylindrical shape for hinge-rotatably attaching the first hinge portion 3514 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510. The right end side is inserted from the left side into the second hinge part 3524 on the right side of the front view of the two second hinge parts 3524 and the two second hinge parts 3524, and the left end side is the front surface of the front lower front first decorative body 3510. A columnar hinge shaft 3525 inserted into the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side of the view from the right side, and a rear surface of the second decorative member 3521 attached to the rear surface of the left end of the front view of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 on the left side of the front view. A hinge retainer 3526 having a hinge shaft 3526a inserted from the left side into the first hinge portion 3514 is provided.

Further, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 has a shallow box-shaped gear base 3527 attached to the right side surface of the second decorative member 3521 when viewed from the front and the right side is open, and a rotation shaft penetrating the gear base 3527. A spur gear-shaped spur gear attached to the rotating shafts of the lower back front first drive motor 3528 attached to the left side surface of the gear base 3527 so as to project to the right and the lower back front first drive motor 3528. The first drive gear 3529, the transmission first gear 3530 that meshes with the first drive gear 3529 and is rotatably attached to the gear base 3527, and the transmission first gear 3530 that meshes with the transmission first gear 3530 and rotates to the gear base 3527. In the front view left side of the transmission second gear 3531 which is possibly attached, the first elevating gear 3532 which is meshed with the transmission second gear 3531 and is rotatably attached to the gear base 3527, and the gear base 3527. A slit that rotates integrally with the first elevating gear 3532, penetrates in the left-right direction, extends on the axis passing through the center of rotation, and slidably inserts the decorative elevating pin 3515 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510. The decorative elevating arm 3533 having 3533a, and the gear base 3527 so as to cover the first drive gear 3529, the transmission first gear 3530, the transmission second gear 3531, and the first elevating gear 3532 on the right side of the front view. It is provided with a flat gear cover 3534 which is closed on the open right end side and is attached to the gear base 3527.

Further, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 is attached to the left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 in front view, and is a decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535 capable of detecting the detection piece 3516 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510. , A sensor cover 3536 attached to the front left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 so as to cover the decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535, and a slider attachment extending downward from the lower right end of the second decorative member 3521 in the front view. A portion 3537 and a guide boss 3538 that protrudes rearward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the right end in the rear view at the upper part of the rear surface of the substrate cover 3523 are provided.

In the lower back front decorative unit 3501, the first hinge pin 3515, the decorative elevating pin 3515, the second hinge portion 3524, the hinge shafts 3525, 3526a, the lower front first drive motor 3528, the first drive gear 3529, and the transmission first A decorative body elevating mechanism in which a gear 3530, a transmission second gear 3531, a first elevating gear 3532, and a decorative body elevating arm 3533 move the lower front first decorative body 3510 by hinge rotation with respect to an axis extending to the left and right. It constitutes 3501A.

Further, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 is formed at the lower part of the second decorative member 3521 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and has a long hole-shaped elevating slit 3540 that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right. , Prepared. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the elevating slit 3540 is formed at the same height at both ends extending to the left and right, and is a portion of the upper side extending to the left and right that is closer to the right from the left end in the front view. It has a lock protrusion 3540a protruding downward. The lock protrusion 3540a is formed so that the left side of the front view is in contact with a line extending horizontally from the upper end of the leftmost semicircular arc of the elevating slit 3540, and the right side of the front view is the elevating slit. It is formed in a straight line extending diagonally from the upper end of the semicircular arc at the right end of the 3540 toward the left end of the portion extending horizontally to the left. The lower side extending to the left and right of the elevating slit 3540 is formed in a shape that imitates the upper side so as to form a substantially constant distance from the upper side.

The elevating unit 3502 of the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 is located between the flat plate-shaped unit base 3550 attached to the front surface of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 and the lower back front decorative unit 3501. The rotation shaft protrudes between the base cover 3551 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 and the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551 with a gap capable of accommodating a part below the front first decorative body 3510. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 3553 attached to the rotating shaft of the lower back front second drive motor 3552, which is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, and A second transmission gear 3554 that meshes with the second drive gear 3553 and is rotatably attached by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551, and an arcuate second elevating gear 3555a that meshes with the second transmission gear 3554. A flat plate-shaped main body 3555b that is approximately half a circle concentric with the arc of the second elevating gear 3555a, a shaft hole 3555c that penetrates through the center of the main body 3555b and is rotatably attached by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551, and A unit elevating arm 3555 having an arm portion 3555d extending from the main body portion 3555b in a direction away from the second elevating gear 3555a, and a front lower back decoration attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d in the unit elevating arm 3555. A columnar unit elevating pin 3556a slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the body unit 3501 and extending from the front end of the unit elevating pin 3556a to the shaft hole 3555c side along the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555. A flat plate-shaped connecting piece 3556b, and an arm reinforcing member 3556 having a mounting boss 3556c that protrudes rearward from the tip of the connecting piece 3556b and has a rear end attached to the front surface of the main body 3555b of the unit elevating arm 3555. It has.

The lower back front second drive motor 3552 is attached to the rear surface of the lower left corner of the unit base 3550 when viewed from the front. The second drive gear 3553 includes a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3553a extending outward. The unit elevating arm 3555 is attached to the unit base 3550 so as to rotate about a position near the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view. The unit elevating arm 3555 is formed so that the distance from the shaft hole 3555c to the tip of the arm portion 3555d is longer than the radius of the second elevating gear 3555a.

Further, the elevating unit 3502 is attached to the unit elevating detection sensor 3557 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 and can detect the detection piece 3353a of the second drive gear 3553, and is attached to the right end portion of the front view on the front surface of the unit base 3550. A slide base 3558 that extends vertically, a rod-shaped intermediate slider 3559 that extends vertically and is slidably attached to the front side of the slide base 3558, and a rod-shaped intermediate slider 3559 that is slidably attached to the front side of the intermediate slider 3559. The front surface of the cage is provided with a vertically extending mounting slider 3560 that is attached to the slider mounting portion 3537 of the lower back front decorative unit 3501.

In this elevating unit 3502, the lower front second drive motor 3552, the second drive gear 3553, the second transmission gear 3554, the unit elevating arm 3555, the arm reinforcing member 3556 (unit elevating pin 3556a), the slide base 3558, and the intermediate slider 3559. , And the mounting slider 3560 constitutes a decorative unit elevating mechanism 3502A that elevates and elevates the lower back front decorative unit 3501.

Further, the elevating unit 3502 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 on the base end side, penetrates back and forth and extends toward the tip side, and the guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decorative unit 3501 is inserted. A guide bush that is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3651a of the guide arm 3651 and the guide arm 3561 that has the guide slit 3651a, and the guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decorative unit 3501 is inserted. 3562, a spring base 3563 attached to the rear end of the guide boss 3538 behind the guide bush 3562, and an arm retainer rotatably supporting the rear surface of the guide arm 3651 on the base end side and attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550. It includes an assist spring 3565 in which both ends are attached to the arm retainer 3564 and the spring base 3563, respectively, and the ahem retainer 3564 and the spring base 3563 are urged in a direction approaching each other. The guide arm 3651 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 at a position closer to the right in the upper left of the front view, and the tip side extends to the right.

The back left lower decoration unit 3503 of the back lower front movable production unit 3500 is attached to the upper left corner of the front view of the unit base 3550, and a three-dimensional decoration imitating the "mahjong" "tile" is formed on the front. The back left lower decorative body 3560 and the back left lower decorative board 3651 which are attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 behind the back left lower decorative body 3560 and have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided. The lower left back decorative unit 3503 can illuminate the lower left back decorative body 3560 by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left back decorative substrate 3651. The lower left decorative unit 3503 is located behind the side unit 2300 when assembled on the game board 5, and the vicinity of the side unit 2300 in the game area 5a can be light-emitting and decorated.

The under-back middle decoration unit 3504 of the under-back front movable production unit 3500 is attached to the part on the left side of the center in the front left-right direction on the front surface of the base cover 3551, and the decoration of the characters "Dokun" is formed. It is provided with a back lower middle decorative body 3570 having a property, and a back lower middle decorative board 3571 which is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the back lower middle decorative body 3570 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back lower middle decoration unit 3504 can make the back lower middle decoration body 3570 emit light by appropriately emitting the LED of the back lower middle decoration substrate 3571. The lower back middle decoration unit 3504 is located between the side unit lower 2200 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view game area 5a in the state of being assembled on the game board 5.

The back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit lower 2200 downward and discharge them. The back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 is a transparent flat passage member 3580 which is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 and has an open front surface, and a transparent flat plate shape which closes the open front surface of the passage member 3580. It includes a cover 3581 and a side rear decorative substrate 3582 that is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the passage member 3580 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Inside the passage member 3580, a general winning opening sensor 3015 that detects a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of 2200 under the side unit is installed. Further, the back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 is located behind the side unit lower 2200 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the LED of the side rear decorative board 3582 is appropriately emitted to light the side unit lower 2200. It can be decorated with light emission.

The back bottom front relay board 3506 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 includes a back bottom front first decorative board 3513, a back bottom front second decorative board 3522, a back bottom front first drive motor 3528, and a decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535. The lower back front second drive motor 3552, the unit elevating detection sensor 3557, the lower left decorative board 3651, the lower back middle decorative board 3571, the side rear decorative board 3582, and the effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510. Is relaying the connection.

Subsequently, the operation of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 will be described. As shown in FIG. 131 (a) and the like, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 has the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 located at the lower end and the back lower front decorative unit 3501 in the normal state. The lower back front first decorative body 3510 is positioned in front of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 by rotating the hinge so as to descend. In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 faces forward.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 129, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 of the elevating unit 3502 is located below the shaft hole 3555c, and is attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d and back. The unit elevating pin 3556a of the arm reinforcing member 3556 inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the lower front decorative unit 3501 is located near the right end of the front view in the elevating slit 3540. Further, the guide arm 3651 rotatably attached to the unit base 3550 is in a state in which the tip thereof extends substantially horizontally toward the right side in the front view, and is inserted into the guide slit 3651a of the guide arm 3651. The guide boss 3538 of the lower back front decoration unit 3501 is located at the left end of the front view in the guide slit 3651a. In this state, the detection piece 3553a of the second drive gear 3553 is detected by the unit elevating detection sensor 3557.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the decorative body elevating arm 3553 in the back lower front second decorative body 3520 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 extends downward from the center of rotation. The decorative body elevating pin 3515 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510, which is inserted into the slit 3533a of the decorative body elevating arm 3553, is located at the end of the slit 3533a on the side close to the center of rotation. There is. In this normal state, the detection piece 3516 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is detected by the decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520.

In this normal state, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, it is located below the display screen of the front-view main liquid crystal display device 1600 and behind the lower side of the center accessory 2500. The first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 in 3501 is located above the stage 2530.

Under normal conditions, the lower back front second drive motor 3552 of the elevating unit 3502 rotates the unit elevating arm 3555 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the second drive gear 3553 and the second transmission gear 3554. Then, the unit elevating pin 3556a at the tip of the arm portion 3555d revolves in the ascending direction about the shaft hole 3555c. When the unit elevating pin 3556a revolves and rises, the unit elevating pin 3556a pushes the inside of the elevating slit 3540 upward, and the lower back front decorative unit 3501 rises. Since the right end portion of the front lower back decorative body unit 3501 is attached to the unit base 3550 via the slide base 3558, the intermediate slider 3559, and the mounting slider 3560, the rear lower front decorative unit 3501 rises straight without tilting.

As the lower back front decorative unit 3501 rises, the unit elevating pin 3556a inserted in the elevating slit 3540 slides (moves) in the elevating slit 3540 to the left in the front view. Then, when the unit elevating pin 3556a moves to the left side of the front view from the most downwardly projecting portion of the lock protrusion 3540a protruding downward in the elevating slit 3540, the drive of the lower back front second drive motor 3552 stops. Then, the rotation of the unit elevating arm 3555 (revolution of the unit elevating pin 3556a) is also stopped, and the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is positioned at the ascending end by the drive unit 3502 (decorative unit elevating mechanism 3502A) (first ascending position). ) (See FIG. 131 (b)).

In this state, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 (unit elevating pin 3556a) is located at the upper right of the front view with respect to the rotation center (shaft hole 3555c) of the unit elevating arm 3555. Due to the weight of the front decorative unit 3501, a rotational moment that causes the unit elevating arm 3555 to rotate clockwise in the front view acts on the tip of the arm portion 3555d. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (c), on the left side surface of the lock projection 3540a on the upper side of the elevating slit 3540 to which the unit elevating pin 3556a is in contact, the portion on the right side of the abutting portion is Since it has invaded the inside of the boundary line L (indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the turning range of the unit elevating pin 3556a, the invading part is required to revolve so that the lock protrusion 3540a moves downward. The lock protrusion 3540a (lower back front decorative unit 3501) must be moved upward against the weight of the lower back front decorative unit 3501 so that The rotational moment acting on the elevating pin 3556a is canceled, and the unit elevating arm 3555 is maintained (locked) at the ascending end without rotating in the front-view clockwise direction.

When the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, substantially the entire lower back front decorative unit 3501 is viewed from the front of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. It is in a state of being located in the frame, and the decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 can be satisfactorily recognized from the player side.

Subsequently, with the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 positioned at the rising end, the first drive gear 3529 and the transmission first gear 3530 are driven by the back lower front first drive motor 3528 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520. When the decorative body elevating arm 3533 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side via the transmission second gear 3531 and the first elevating gear 3532, the slit 3533a of the decorative body elevating arm 3533 enters the slit 3533a. The first hinge portion 3514 and the first hinge portion 3514 so that the decorative body elevating pin 3515 of the inserted lower back front first decorative body 3510 is pressed forward and the lower side of the lower back lower front first decorative body 3510 moves forward and upward. The lower back front first decorative body 3510 is hinged around the second hinge portion 3524.

Then, when the decorative body elevating arm 3533 rotates about 180 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side, the rotation of the back lower front first drive motor 3528 stops, and the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is back lower front second. It is in a state of being located above the decorative body 3520 (elevated position or open position). In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510, which was initially facing forward, is in a state of facing backward, and instead, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 facing rearward. The second back decorative member 3512 facing the second decorative member 3521 is located above the second decorative member 3521 and whose front surface is substantially on the same surface as the second decorative member 3521 and faces forward. As a result, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are combined to form one large decoration (decoration of the character "Wa") (FIG. 131 (Fig. 131). c)).

In the state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised and the lower back front first decorative body 3510 is rotated to open the hinge, the center accessory 2500 is viewed from the front in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. A substantially lower half of the inside of the frame (display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520 (see FIG. 141).

In this way, the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 maintains the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 in a state of being stopped at the position of the rising end even when the lower back front second drive motor 3552 is not energized. Therefore, the load acting on the lower back front second drive motor 3552 can be reduced. Further, since the unit elevating pin 3556a revolving in the ascending direction is locked in the middle, when the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is locked at the ascending end position, the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is locked. There is no unnatural movement such as lowering, and the movement of the back lower front decorative unit 3501 can be entertained by the player.

Further, in the back lower front decorative body unit 3501, as an operation of raising the back lower front first decorative body 3510, the hinge is rotated with respect to the axis extending to the left and right to raise the back, so that the sliding is linear. Since the part of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 that can be seen from the player side changes from moment to moment, it can be made to stand out and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. By rotating the hinge of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 to open it, the first back decorative member 3512 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520, which cannot be seen in a normal state, The second decorative member 3521 of the above can be shown, and the player can be surprised.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 141. FIG. 132 shows a state in which the first decorative body after the back and the second decorative body after the back are rotated together in a normal position in the movable effect unit after the back of the back unit so that the second decorative surface faces the front. It is a front view of the game board shown. In FIG. 133, the back lower rear movable effect unit is closed with the lower back first decorative body and the lower back second decorative body, and the first decorative surface of the lower back rear first decorative body is turned to the front. In the state, slide and move it to approximately the center in the left-right direction in the game area, and slide the back-up left first decorative body and the back-up left second decorative body of the back-up left movable production unit to approximately the center in the left-right direction in the game area. It is a front view of the game board shown in the moved state. FIG. 134 shows the second of each of the lower back first decorative body and the lower back second decorative body by rotating the hinge rotation of the lower back first decorative body of the lower back movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 133. While turning the decorative surface to the front, open the back upper left second decorative body by hinge-rotating the back upper left movable production unit to open the back upper left first decorative body fixed decorative member and the back upper left second decorative body first. (Ii) It is a front view of the game board which shows the decorative member facing the front. FIG. 135 shows the second of each of the lower back first decorative body and the lower back second decorative body by rotating the hinge rotation of the lower back first decorative body of the lower back movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 133. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the decorative surface faces the front.

FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit is slid and moved to the appearance position at the right end of the front view. FIG. 137 is a front-view counterclockwise direction in which the back-up-middle decorative body unit of the back-up-middle movable effect unit in the back unit is moved to the position of the descending end, and the back-up-middle decorative body unit extends diagonally downward to the left in the front view. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state of being rotated in the clockwise direction. FIG. 138 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 137 and slid to a position in the half-opened intermediate open state. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 138 and slid to a position in the fully open state. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower front decorative body unit of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit is positioned at the rising end. FIG. 141 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower back lower front first decorative body is hinged and raised above the lower back lower front second decorative body from the state of FIG. 140.

In a normal state, the game board 5 of the present embodiment displays the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIG. 81 and the like. , Can be clearly seen from the player side (front). In this normal state, the hinge of the back unit 3000, the back lower rear movable production unit 3100, the rotatable back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are closed, and the back lower rear first decorative body 3120 is closed. Only the first decorative surface 3111 of the 3110 is directed forward so that it can be seen from the player side, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 of the first decorative surface 3111 is displayed on the right side of the lower right side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The screen is facing forward.

Further, in a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are hinged to rotate the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The second decorative body 3220 on the back upper left is located in front of the fixed decorative member 3211. The front side is invisible from the player side by the back left middle decoration unit 3050.

Further, in a normal state, the back left movable decorative body 3321 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit is located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 which is the left end of the front view with respect to the left and right sliding directions. A part of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 faces slightly forward through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Further, in a normal state, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 of the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rising end above the upper side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A part of the front view center accessory 2500 is visible forward through the frame.

Further, in a normal state, in the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is in front of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 by hinge rotation. In the state of being folded so as to descend to the side, the descending end below the front view from the lower side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that the lower back front decorative unit 3501 does not face forward from the frame of the center accessory 2500. Is located in.

The game board 5 is after the back of the back unit 3000 according to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery, which are drawn by accepting the game balls in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 perform predetermined effects (movable effect and light emission effect). ..

Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 is viewed in a plan view by the back lower rear second drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130. Rotate it clockwise so that the second decorative surface 3122, which was facing backwards, faces the front (see FIG. 132). At this time, the lower back first decorative body 3110, which is closed and located in front of the lower back second decorative body 3120, is pushed by the lower back second decorative body 3120 and rotates together. As a result, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are located in front of the lower right corner of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the front view, and are attached to the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By blocking a part of the displayed production image, the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom can be made to stand out, and the "heavenly luck" applied to the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom. The decoration of "" can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can be made to think that there is something good and the expectation for the game can be raised.

Further, as an effect (movable effect) using the back lower back movable effect unit 3100 and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, the back lower rear movable effect unit 3150 of the slide unit 3150 is the third. The drive motor 3155 slides and moves the rotary drive unit 3130 to the position at the left end of the front view while keeping the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 closed, and the rotary drive unit 3130. The rear lower rear first drive motor 3134 slightly rotates the lower rear first decorative body 3110 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view so that the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) faces the front. At the same time, in the back-up left movable production unit 3200, the back-up left first decorative body 3210 and the back-up left second decorative body 3220 are back-up left first by the back-up left second drive motor 3245 of the ride unit 3240. With the first decorative member 3221 facing the front while being closed with respect to the decorative body 3210, the first decorative member 3221 is slid and moved to the position at the right end of the front view together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 (see FIG. 133).

In the state shown in FIG. 133, the axis extending up and down for hinge rotation of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, and the back upper left. The vertical axis for hinge-rotating the back-up left second decorative body 3220 with respect to the back-up left first decorative body 3210 of the movable production unit 3200 is located coaxially with the left and right of the game area 5a. It is almost the same as the center of the direction. In this state, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in a state where the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3220 on the back top left are diagonally arranged within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view. It is located in front of. As a result, the player can be surprised by the movement of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom to the center side and the appearance of the second decorative body 3220 on the back top left.

Then, in a state where the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are moved to the center in the left-right direction (state of FIG. 133), the rotation drive unit 3130 in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100. The lower back first decorative body 3110 folded by the lower back first drive motor 3134 is rotated clockwise in a plan view so as to open forward from the lower back second decorative body 3120, and the lower back The rear lower rear first decorative body 3110 is arranged on the left side of the rear second decorative body 3120 so that the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front, and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is the back upper left of the rotation drive unit 3230. The back upper left second decorative body 3220 folded by the first drive motor 3235 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view so as to open forward from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, and the back upper left first. The second decorative body 3220 on the back top and left is arranged on the right side of the decorative body 3210, and the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 are directed to the front (see FIG. 134).

In the state of FIG. 134, the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 is lined up on the left and right sides of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear movable effect unit 3120, and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is lined up on the left and right. The back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are in a state of being united vertically in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It covers the front of the display screen. Further, the second decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 facing the front and the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120, and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200. The characters "Jakusei" written vertically are written on the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220, respectively. It will be visible from the side. As a result, a large decorative body will appear within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (in front of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600), which will have a great impact on the player and give a chance such as a "big hit game". It is possible to strongly suggest the arrival of the game, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

By the way, in the above description, the effect of opening the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 of the back lower rear movable unit 3100 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 at the same time has been described. As shown in 135, only the first decorative body 3110 after the back of the movable effect unit 3100 may be opened first. As a result, the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are first opened by hinge rotation, and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front. Then, the word "holy" will be visible first. At this time, since the cutout decoration 3170 such as "one" is applied to the upper side of the character "holy", the decoration that is a set for the player to complete the cutout decoration 3170 on this upper side. It is possible to recognize that there is (cut-out decoration 3260), and the player is asked whether or not the decoration that is the set appears (whether or not the second decorative body 3220 on the back top and left opens by hinge rotation). It is possible to make the player feel excited and to raise the expectation of the player.

Further, as an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slid and moved to the appearance position on the right side of the front view by the back left drive motor 3333 of the back left drive unit 3330. In this state, most of the frame-shaped back left movable decoration 3320 located directly behind the back left fixed decoration 3310 is to the right of the back left fixed decoration 3310 in the front view within the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located at and can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 136). In this state, if a predetermined effect image is displayed in the area corresponding to the inside of the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged at the rear, the player can be reminded. It is possible to give the illusion that the effect image is displayed in the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. Further, as shown in the figure, the back left movable decorative body 3320 has the same size and the same decoration as the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, so that the back left movable decorative body 3320 is movable. When the decorative body 3320 appears, the back left is movable with the illusion that another liquid crystal display device has appeared on the left side so as to be paired with the first decorative body 3110 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) after the back bottom on the right side. The effect images displayed on the decorative body 3320 and the first decorative body 3110 after the underside can be greatly enjoyed.

Further, as an effect using the back-up middle movable production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440. The back-up middle decoration unit 3410 attached to the tip of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end, and the back-up middle decoration unit 3460 is driven by the back-up middle third drive motor 3436. Rotate the 3410 to the rotating end in the counterclockwise direction. In this state, the center of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is located substantially in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view, and the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 extends diagonally with its right end side raised. (Fig. 137). As a result, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410, which was located above the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, descends to the center position while rotating, and the movement causes the player to move the back-up middle decoration. Expectations for the game that can draw attention to the unit 3410 and make me think that there may be something good by moving the decoration unit 3410 on the back of the back in a form reminiscent of the "thousand-point stick" of "Mahjong". You can enhance the feeling.

Then, as shown in FIG. 137, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end and extends diagonally, and is closed by the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410. The pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid in directions away from each other to be in the intermediate open state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 138, the central decorative portion 3412a and the four central horizontal decorative portions 3412b of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are formed between the pair of the back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. Since it is in a state of facing forward, it is possible to remind the player of the "5,000-point stick" of "Mahjong", and it makes me think that the possibility of "big hit game" has increased, and I expect it. The feeling can be further enhanced.

Further, from the state of FIG. 138, when the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are further slid in the directions away from each other by the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 to be in the fully open state, as shown in FIG. 139, the pair The central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 all face forward from between the back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. It is possible to remind the player of the "Mahjong" "Mahjong", and to be convinced that the lottery first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit". It becomes possible to enhance the interest of the player.

In addition, as an effect using the back lower front movable production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is hinged in front of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 and is in a folded state. Then, the lower back front second drive motor 3552 of the elevating unit 3502 raises the lower back front decorative unit 3501 from the position of the lower end to the position of the ascending end. When the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, substantially the entire lower back front decorative unit 3501 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in front view, and the game is played. The decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 can be clearly seen from the person side (see FIG. 140). As a result, the lower back front first decorative body 3510 rises from below to cover the lower part of the front surface of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the player can be made to suggest the arrival of an opportunity, which gives a feeling of expectation for the game. It can be raised. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first table decoration member 3511 of the first decorative body 3511 in front of the back is decorated with a plurality of "mahjong" tiles lined up. By raising the table decoration member 3511 so that it can be visually recognized, it is possible to entertain the player with the illusion that his tiles are lined up.

Then, in a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised to the position of the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, the lower back front first drive motor 3528 of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 (decorative body elevating mechanism 3501A) is used. When the lower back front first decorative body 3510 is hinged with respect to the axis extending to the left and right so as to rise and is positioned above the lower back front second decorative body 3520, the lower back front which was previously invisible The upper part of the second decorative member 3521 of the second decorative body 3520 and the first back decorative member of the first decorative body 3510 are arranged one above the other. In this state, in front view, substantially the lower half of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520. The decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are combined to form one large decoration (decoration of the character "Wa") (Fig. 141). See). As a result, the first table decoration member 3511, which is decorated with multiple "mahjong tiles" lined up side by side, hinges around the axis extending to the left and right, and the character "Wa" means "Agari". Because the decoration of the above appears, it is possible to convince the player that the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit", and the expectation for the occurrence of the "big hit game" makes it interesting. Can be enhanced.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game machine 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and an upper plate liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of an effect image on the device 244 or the like is provided. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by the rotation operation of the handle lever 504.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551, the general winning opening sensor 3015 that detects the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2547 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and detects the game ball received in the first major winning opening 2005. The first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening 2006a as the second big winning opening 2006, and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 that detects the game ball received in the second lower big winning opening 2006b. Detection signals from the second lower prize opening sensor 2557, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively.

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker solenoid are used. A drive signal is output to the 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display, and the first special symbol storage indicator of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port. , The drive signal is output to the second special symbol storage display, the normal symbol display, the normal symbol storage display, the game status display, the round display, and the like.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 2104 and the second start port sensor 2551, Also, the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball frequently enters. The detection of the game ball by the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 also occurs frequently. For this reason, the first grand prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. To do.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
Although detailed illustration of the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game ball is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 682, and the ball by the ball feed solenoid 551 are performed. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guidance unit 820, and a ball removing switch for discharging the game ball in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation are provided.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is a micro that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, and the ball burnout detection sensor 827 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. To.

Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade 839 and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passages 381d and 382d of the payout device 830, and the payout blade 839 is difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is notified. Is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number " When "5" is displayed, it is notified that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is "full" (specifically, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and a number is displayed. When "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (meaning that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Is displayed to notify that the player is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 332 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 333 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Will be done. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit 334, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. It is input to 334 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551, is not shown in detail, but is a launch control input in which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 5a based on this clock signal, and this launch reference pulse. A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682 based on the above, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the launch reference pulse are provided. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle operation sensor 507, the launch reference pulse inputs the drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a with the launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle lever 504. When this is done, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launching device 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 142, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. , A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above and a sound ROM for storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the vibration exciter 242 provided in the frame 3 and the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, and colors provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to LEDs, etc., and door-side drive light emission data composed of frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to door frame 3 side Control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the precision liquid crystal display device 244 can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. In addition to this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and music and music according to various effects from the speaker 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and the like. Control so that sound effects etc. flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a sound signal 921 for bass of the main body frame 4 and a plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side, or By sending 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of commands different from the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

The effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives a game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 provided in the door frame 3, the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, and each drive motor provided in the game board 5. Output to.

[6-4. Production display control unit]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is used as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that displays and controls the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM for storing various data on the screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. And have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Drawing control is performed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. It stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the above, control data (display command) and corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data. The schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data is various types of screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and extracts the sprite data from the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Further, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. To do. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. In this "line buffer method", drawing data for one line that draws the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and the line buffer holds This is a method of outputting the retained drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display. This will affect the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when displaying various characters on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and have a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "sprite superposition order"), and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. It is drawn on the 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in width 2 x height 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front. And the sub-scan which repeats the main scan in the direction intersecting the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is input to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 as the main scan. Output to each minute pixel.

[7. Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 81, 87, 92, 142, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, the game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more the ball is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be driven. That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are not shown. The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down while contacting the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522, which is open in the frame of 2500, through the guideway 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth from side to side to the central guide portion 2531 in the center in the left-right direction or the side guide portions 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is emitted backward from any of the above. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guide portion 2531 of the stage 2530, the game released from the central guide portion 2531 because the central guide portion 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002. The ball has a high probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the first grand prize opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2302 of the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven) to the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ), And enter the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right distribution space 2541, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails and circulates while changing the flow direction thereof in various ways. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper part, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549 are provided at the lower part.

The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side thereof. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 closes the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize 2006b that are lined up side by side as the second prize 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side of the front view into the game area 5a. Be released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball faces the first prize opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100, and when the first prize opening 2005 is in the open state. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball flowing through the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right distribution space 2543 flows down while the increase in the distribution speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right distribution space 2543, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a may enter the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the lottery normal lottery result is obtained. In the case of "normal hit", the second start port door member 2549 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds) to open the second start port 2004. Then, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the lapse of the normal fluctuation time.

Further, if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hits", "small hits", "probability fluctuation hits", "time reduction hits", etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and "5R big hit". There are "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", and the like.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the lapse of the special fluctuation time, either the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the payout device is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls from 830 are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 allow the game balls to be accepted, by allowing the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 to accept the game balls, many games can be played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the first big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted. Alternatively, if any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls to the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is satisfied, the game balls cannot be accepted in the closed state. The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second major winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second major winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of "big hit", for example, in the first round (1st round), the second upper prize opening 2006a opens to allow the game ball to be accepted, and the game ball is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions for making it unacceptable, and then accepted. Until (during the interval), the second lower prize opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2R) in which the game ball can be accepted, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has passed in the meantime, the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened again so that the game ball can be accepted. Then, the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are exhausted. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, either the second upper prize opening 2006a or the second lower prize opening 2006b is in a state where the game ball can be accepted during the "big hit". If you hit right with and distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball will surely be accepted in the second big prize opening 2006, and the player will be entertained by eliminating the missing game ball. Can be done.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. To. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (a sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. In the effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, each symbol sequence is changed in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The columns are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three symbol columns is stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol columns that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) is generated according to the result of the special lottery.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates to confirm the image). Is different from the time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left, according to the lottery special lottery result. The middle decoration unit 3050, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
In the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment, the back bottom rear first decorative body 3110 of the back bottom rear effect unit 3100 is the first decorative body of the present invention, and the back bottom rear second decorative body 3120 in the present invention is the first decorative body of the present invention. (Ii) In the decorative body, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 in the present embodiment is used in the effect display device of the present invention, in which the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom, the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 is used for the decorative member of the present invention, the decorative body support shaft 3125 in the present embodiment is used for the support shaft of the present invention, and the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 in the present embodiment is used for the under-axis gear of the present invention. The first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom, the decorative body support shaft 3125, and the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 correspond to the decorative unit of the present invention, respectively. There is.

Further, the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c of the rotary drive unit 3130 in the back-and-forth movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment is the on-axis gear of the present invention, and the first drive gear 3133 of the present embodiment is the upper drive of the present invention. In the gear, the back-bottom rear first drive motor 3134 in the present embodiment is used in the upper drive motor of the present invention, and the second drive gear 3136 in the present embodiment is used in the lower drive gear of the present invention. (2) The drive motor 3137 corresponds to the lower drive motor of the present invention, and the lower back first drive motor 3134 and the lower back second drive motor 3137 in the present embodiment correspond to the drive motor of the present invention, respectively.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player drives the game ball into the game area 5a and accepts it in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 or Depending on the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery (simply referred to as the result of the special lottery), which is drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, the back unit 3000 is a movable effect unit 3100 The back bottom rear first drive motor 3134 and the back bottom rear second drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130, and the back bottom rear third drive motor 3155 of the slide unit 3150 are attached to each other so as to be hinged to rotate. The lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear lower second decorative body 3120 can be rotated together in a superposed state, opened from the superposed state, superposed from the open state, and the lower rear lower first decorative body 3120. The body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom can be slid to the left and right, and the first decorative surface 3111 facing the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 in the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom is on the player side. Since the effect image can be shown to the player when the player is directed to be visible from the outside, various effects can be presented to the player to entertain, and the player can not get bored. At this time, the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125, which extends vertically from the lower back of the second decorative body 3120 and protrudes downward from the lower end of the side to which the hinge is rotatably attached, are rotationally driven. The upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131 in the unit 3130 are rotatably supported, respectively, and are rotatably supported at two positions separated from each other as much as possible. Therefore, the decorative body support shaft 3125 tends to tilt the decorative body support shaft 3125 because the decorative body support shaft 3125 protrudes from a position eccentric with respect to the center of gravity of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120. Even if an eccentric load acts, the decorative body support shaft 3125 can be made difficult to tilt, and the decorative body support shaft 3125 is supported straight to support the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body 3120 after the back. It can be rotated, and uneven wear is caused by sharing the load from the lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear lower rear decorative body 3120 at two locations, the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d. The lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear lower second decorative body 3120 can be rotated in good condition for a long period of time by reducing the lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear lower second decorative body 3120. It is possible to entertain the player with the production using the bearing and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the length of the decorative body support shaft 3125 is set to a length within the range of 0.5 to 1 times the height of the lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear lower second decorative body 3120, and the upper end portion thereof. At the lower end, the rotary drive unit 3130 is rotatably supported at the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3130, and the eccentric load acting on the decorative body support shaft 3125 is applied. Since the bearings are shared and supported at different locations, the decorative body support shaft 3125 tilts even if the entire lower rear first decorative body 3110, the lower rear lower second decorative body 3120, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 become heavy. It can be rotatably supported in good condition without any problems.

Further, at the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 is attached to the rotating shaft of the second rear drive motor 3137 from the side near the center of the front view game area 5a. The two drive gears 3136 are meshed so that the decorative body support shaft 3125 is rotated by the second drive motor 3137 after lowering the back, and under normal conditions, the lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear second decoration The second drive motor 3137 after the back bottom can receive a force that causes the load from the body 3120 to move (fall) toward the center of the game area 5a acting on the lower end side of the decorative body support shaft 3125. On the other hand, at the upper end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation shaft of the rear lower rear first drive motor 3134 is viewed from the side far from the center of the front view game area 5a with respect to the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132. Since the first drive gear 3133 attached to the above is engaged to rotate the decorative body support shaft 3125 by the lower rear first drive motor 3134, the lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear first decorative body 3110 and The force that causes the load from the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom to move (fall) away from the center of the game area 5a acting on the upper end side of the decorative body support shaft 3125 is applied to the first drive motor 3134 after the back bottom. You can receive it at. Therefore, a force (uneven load) that causes the decorative body support shaft 3125 to fall is applied to the lower bearing portion 3131d and the upper bearing portion 3131c of the rotary drive unit base 3131, and the back lower rear second drive motor 3137 and the lower back. Since it is also received by the rear first drive motor 3134, the decorative body support shaft 3125 can be made more difficult to fall down, and the lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second through the decorative body support shaft 3125. The decorative body 3120 can be rotatably supported in good condition.

Further, with respect to the lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear lower second decorative body 3120 which are rotatably attached to each other by hinge rotation, the decorative body support shaft 3125 and the rotation transmission member 3132 are coaxial with the axis of hinge rotation. Since it is rotated, for example, the lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear lower second decorative body 3120 are superposed on one side surface (the first decorative surface of the lower rear lower first decorative body 3110). With the 3111) facing forward, the lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear second decorative body 3120 are rotated together by about 180 degrees via the decorative body support shaft 3125 to rotate the opposite surface (back). Assuming that the second decorative surface 3122) of the lower rear second decorative body 3120 is facing forward, the moving distance in the left-right direction of the superposed lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 is possible. Since it becomes longer and can be moved from the initial position to a position moved by approximately the same distance as the size of the lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear lower second decorative body 3120 in the left-right direction, it is arranged rearward. It is possible to move the other member (main liquid crystal display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image) between the unobtrusive position and the obstructive position, and rearward according to the position (game state). The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be made to stand out, and the lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear lower second decorative body 3120 can be made to stand out. It can be an opportunity.

Further, in the rotary drive unit 3130, the back lower rear first drive motor 3134 is placed on the side far from the center of the game area 5a with the decorative body support shaft 3125 in between, and the back lower rear second drive motor 3137 is placed on the side closer to the center. Since they are mounted respectively, the first drive motor 3134 after the back bottom and the second drive motor 3137 after the back bottom do not interfere with each other in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and the pachinko machine 1 that exerts the above-mentioned effects and effects. Can be easily embodied.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player drives the game ball into the game area 5a and accepts it in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2002 or the second. Depending on the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery (simply also referred to as the special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball to the start port 2004, in the back-down movable production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, The lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120, which are hinged and rotatably attached to the axis extending vertically on one of the four sides, are movable units. Hinge-rotated by the rotary drive unit 3130 to close, open, rotate together, or by the slide unit 3150 as a movable unit, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear first. (Ii) The decorative body 3120 slides in the left-right direction between the right outer position and the inner position of the front view main liquid crystal display device 1600. The lower back first decorative body 3110 is provided with a sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 whose outer circumference is decorated by the first decorative surface 3111 on one surface, and the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 can be visually recognized from the player side. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the effect image displayed when pointing to. On the other hand, at the position where a part of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is sandwiched at the same height in the left-right direction with respect to the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom, it is arranged at the left outer position of the front view main liquid crystal display device 1600. The frame-shaped back left movable decoration 3320 hidden behind the back left fixed decoration 3310 in the back left movable production unit 3300 is left outside of the front view main liquid crystal display device 1600 by the back left drive unit 3330. Move left and right between the position and the inner position. The back left movable decorative body 3320 has a frame shape with the same decoration as the first decorative surface 3111 of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110, and is located inside the front view main liquid crystal display device 1600 (front position). Occasionally, by displaying a specific effect image different from the effect image displayed in the remaining area in the area directly behind the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the player side ( When viewed from the front), the player can visually recognize a specific effect image that can give the illusion that a liquid crystal display device (effect display means) is provided in the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. .. In this way, the movements of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110, the back lower rear second decorative body 3120, and the back left movable decorative body 3320 are displayed on the left liquid crystal display device 3114 of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110. A variety of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining the effect image to be produced and a specific effect image visually recognized through the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 in the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is possible to make the player less bored and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120, which are rotatably attached to each other by hinges, are opened side by side from a closed state in which the surfaces are overlapped with each other. In this state, the surface of the decoration by the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom can be enlarged (expanded) in the front view game area 5a to be conspicuous. , The player's interest could be strongly attracted to the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120, and spread by the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120. In addition to being able to entertain the decoration, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, the back left movable decorative body 3320 has the same decoration as the decoration applied to the outer periphery of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 in the back lower rear first decorative body 3110, and is inside the front view main liquid crystal display device 1600. When it is moved to a position so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, it seems that the player is provided with a total of two rear lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 having a sub liquid crystal display device 3114, one on each side. Since it is possible to make the illusion that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with two sub liquid crystal display devices 3114 in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the appealing power to the player is increased and the pachinko to be played is played. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the machine, the game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

Further, in the back left movable decorative body 3320, the effect image is displayed by using the rear main liquid crystal display device 1600, and since the back left movable decorative body 3310 is not provided with the liquid crystal display device, the main liquid crystal display device 16000, The main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device despite having three display areas within the frame of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the back left movable decorative body 3320. The effect image can be displayed in the three display areas only by performing the two display controls of 3114, and the increase in the load related to the control of the effect image (for example, the control related to the effect by the peripheral control board 1510) can be suppressed. Can be done. Therefore, the control related to the effect becomes unstable due to the overload, and the display of the effect image and the movements of the back bottom rear first decorative body 3110, the back bottom rear second decorative body 3120, and the back left movable decorative body 3320, etc. Since it is possible to prevent unintended display and operation, it is desired by the production image, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110, the back lower rear second decorative body 3120, the back left movable decorative body 3320, and the like. It is possible to surely exert the effect of the above, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is placed at the same height as the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 (back lower rear second decorative body 3120) with a part of the front view main liquid crystal display device 1600 in between in the left-right direction. Since they are arranged apart from each other, the back has the same decoration when the back left movable decorative body 3320 is moved to the inside position of the front view main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that it can be seen from the player side. Since the lower rear first decorative body 3110 (first decorative surface 3111) and the back left movable decorative body 3320 are arranged side by side, two similar decorative bodies exist in the front view game area 5a. It is possible to make the player strongly recognize this, and imagine the production presented by the two decorative bodies (the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the movable decorative body 3320 on the back left) depending on the player. By going around, it is possible to raise expectations for the production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in a state where the back left movable decorative body 3320 can be visually recognized, the back left movable decorative body 3110 and the back left movable decorative body 3320 are arranged side by side with a part of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in between. From the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110, in the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320, and the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back left movable decorative body 3320 in the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Three areas for displaying the effect image of the area between are arranged side by side, and by displaying the effect image using these arranged areas, it is possible to perform an impactful effect and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back left movable decorative body 3320 are arranged on the left and right at the same height, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 is compared with the case where the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 is arranged vertically. The effect image displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the specific effect image of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 that can be visually recognized through the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 can easily enter the player's view at the same time. It is possible to simultaneously recognize and entertain the production images of the first decorative body 3110 side and the back left movable decoration body 3320 side after the back bottom, and it is possible to make it difficult to miss one of the production images, so that the production image is overlooked. It is possible to avoid feeling lost due to the loss, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the slide unit 3150 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 slides the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 to the left and right along the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the posture of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom does not change (it does not rotate around the axis extending in the front-rear direction), the effect image remains displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom. Even if it is slid in the state of, the posture (orientation) of the effect image of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 does not change and it does not become difficult to see, and the effect image can be shown to the player in a good state, and the player can see it. It is possible to surely entertain the production image and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the back left movable effect unit 3300 moves the back left movable decorative body 3320 in the same left-right direction as the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120. Therefore, as compared with the case where the first decorative body 3110 and the like are moved in a direction different from that of the first decorative body 3110 and the like after the lower back, the first decorative body 3110 and the like after the lower back and the left movable decorative body 3320 are brought closer to each other. By moving it away from or away from it, or by moving it in the same direction together, in addition to having the same decoration for the player, the movement also causes the first decoration body 3110 and the back left to move. It becomes possible to recognize that the decorative body 3320 is a decorative body closely related to each other, and when an effect using either the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 or the back left movable decorative body 3320 is performed, The rest of the players will be more concerned about it, and it will give them a sense of anticipation. It can be suppressed.

Further, by the slide unit 3150 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower back rear second decorative body 3120 are arranged in the left-right direction orthogonal to the axis (rotation axis) of the rotation center. Since the rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are slid, even if the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are slid, the rotation drive unit The rotary drive unit 3130 is not located at the place where the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom were originally located via the 3130. Therefore, when the rotary drive unit 3130 is invisible in the initial state, the rotary drive unit 3130 can remain invisible even if it is slid by the slide unit 3150. Since the rotation drive unit 3130 supporting the body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 cannot be seen, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are moving by themselves. It is possible to make the movement of such an impression, and the player can enjoy the movements such as hinge rotation and sliding of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom.

Further, when the back left movable decorative body 3320 is in the left outer position of the front view main liquid crystal display device 1600, the back left movable decorative body 3310 arranged in front makes the back left movable decorative body 3320 invisible from the player side. Therefore, when the back left movable decorative body 3320 is moved (appeared) to the inside position of the front view main liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the game state, the back left movable with the same decoration as the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom is movable. The decorative body 3320 will appear, and it can be seen that the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom having the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 has increased by one, which surprises the player and draws attention to the back left movable decorative body 3320. At the same time, it is possible to surely show the player a specific effect image of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displayed through the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320, entertaining the player and suppressing deterioration of interest. Can be made to.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player drives the game ball into the game area 5a to change the game state, the game state is changed according to the changed game state (first start port 2002 or second start). (According to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the mouth 2004), the back side arranged in the front view opening 1112 of the game panel in the front view game area 5a. The two lower back first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 in the unit 3000 are laterally oriented along the surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) by the slide unit 3150. The rotation drive unit 3130 causes the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back to rotate by hinges with respect to the vertically extending axes, and the first decorative body after the lower back first. The first decorative substrate after the back and the second decorative substrate after the back, which are provided on the decorative body 3110 and the second decorative substrate after the back, respectively, provide the first decorative substrate after the back and the second decorative substrate after the back, and the second decorative substrate after the back. Since the surface of the decorative body 3120 is light-emittingly decorated, in the two back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120, the back lower rear first decorative substrate and the back lower rear second decorative substrate are used. By appropriately combining the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) by the rotation drive unit 3130 and the movable effect by the rotary drive unit 3130 and the slide unit 3150, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, making the player less bored and playing the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

With such a configuration, for example, in a normal state, the rotation drive unit 3130 folds the two back-lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the back-lower rear second decorative body 3120 so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction. The side side (left side) that is supported so that the hinges can be rotated is directed toward the center side of the front view game area 5a. It is assumed that the rear second decorative body 3120 is moved to a position on the right side away from the center of the front view game area 5a.

In this normal state, the lower back second decoration located on the rear side of the two lower back first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 superposed by the rotary drive unit 3130. When the two lower back first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are rotated together in a superposed state so that the body 3120 is located on the front side (see FIG. 104 (b)). ), The two back lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 approach the center side of the front view game area 5a, and at the same time, the rear lower back rear third, which cannot be visually recognized under normal conditions. (Ii) Since the first decorative surface 3121 of the decorative body 3120 becomes visible, the decoration of the first decorative surface 3121 that has become visible can suggest the arrival of an opportunity or the like and entertain the player.

Further, in a normal state, the front lower back first decoration of the two lower back first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 that are folded and superposed by the rotary drive unit 3130. When the body 3110 is rotated so that the second decorative surface 3112 facing rearward faces forward (see FIG. 105 (e)), it rotates by hinge-rotating like opening a folded book. The second decorative surface 3112 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative surface 3122 facing the front of the lower back second decorative body 3120 located on the rear side rotate the hinge rotation. The state is such that they are lined up facing forward with the axis as the boundary, and the two superimposed rear lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are deployed and the two lower back rears in the front game area 5a. The range of decoration by the first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom can be widened to stand out, and the two back lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the back lower rear that cannot be seen under normal conditions can be made conspicuous. The second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 can be visually recognized, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In this case, since the decorations of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which are lined up facing forward, are made to be one with each other, the two superimposed back-bottom-back first decorative bodies 3110 and the back are used. By opening the lower rear second decorative body 3120, one large decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

Further, the rotation drive unit 3130 rotates the two back lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back lower rear first decorative body 3110 on the front side of the lower back lower rear first decorative body 3120 which are folded and superposed. From the unfolded and opened state, the back lower rear second decorative body 3120, which was arranged on the rear side in the superposed state, is superposed on the front side of the previously rotated back lower rear first decorative body 3110. When the hinge is rotated to (see FIG. 104 (c)), the second decorative surface 3122, which was previously invisible from the player's side, becomes visible as the second decorative surface 3122. The decoration of the game can entertain the player, and at the same time, it can make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. it can.

Further, in a normal state, the slide unit 3150 is used to move the two lower back first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 to positions close to the center of the front view game area 5a (FIG. 105). (See (d)), the second under-back first decorative body 3110 facing forward, which is located on the front side of the two under-back first decorative bodies 3110 and under-back second decorative body 3120. The decoration of the decorative surface 3111 becomes conspicuous from the player side, and the player can pay attention to the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and faces the front in the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom. The decoration of the first decorative surface 3111 can entertain the player.

In this way, the rotation drive unit 3130, the slide unit 3150, the back lower rear first decorative substrate, and the back lower rear second decorative substrate, the two back lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative substrate. As described above, the 3120 can be made to move in various ways, and the surfaces of the two back-bottom rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the back-back rear second decorative body 3120 can be variously luminescently decorated. By appropriately combining the movement (movable effect) and the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect), the pattern of the effect can be made various, and by presenting the various effect to the player, the player will not get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the two lower back first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are supported so as to be hingeably rotatable with respect to the vertically extending axes, the lower back first decoration is provided. The rotational moment due to the weight of the body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 does not act in the direction of rotating the rotation axis, and the two lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 It is possible to suppress an increase in the load applied to the rotary drive unit 3130 (the first drive motor 3134 after the back bottom and the second drive motor 3137 after the back bottom) for rotating the two back bottom rear first decorative bodies. The 3110 and the second decorative body after the back bottom can be rotated smoothly, respectively, and the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom can be reliably rotated to ensure the above-mentioned effects. Can play.

Further, the rotation range of the two lower back first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 by the rotation drive unit 3130 is parallel to the game panel 1100 passing through the rotation center supported by hinge rotation. Since it is on the front side, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is in the front-rear direction (depth) as compared with the case where the two back-lowering rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the back-lowering rear second decorative body 3120 can rotate once. The diameter of the rotation range of the two lower back first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 with respect to the direction) can be increased by that amount. (Ii) The decorative body 3120 can be made larger. Therefore, since the two under-back first decorative bodies 3110 and the under-back second decorative body 3120 can be made as large as possible, respectively, the two under-back first decorative bodies 3110 are included in the game area 5a. And the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom can be made more conspicuous to attract the attention of the player, and the movable effect by the two decorative bodies 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom can be produced. It can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, since the rotation range of the two back lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 is set to the front side of the surface parallel to the game panel 1100, the two back lower rear first decorative bodies 3110. Two back lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and back lower rear second decorative bodies 3110 and back lower rear second decorative bodies 3110 at positions as close as possible to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the 3110 and back lower rear second decorative body 3120. The decorative body 3120 can be arranged, and the feeling that the two lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are floated from the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like provided in the front game area 5a. It is possible to reduce the appearance of. Therefore, when the two back lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back rear second decorative body 3120 are not hinged or slid (when they are not moved), the two back lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 are not moved. Since the first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 can be blended into the decoration of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) to make it look like an integrated decoration, two backs and lowers can be used depending on the game state. By moving the first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 after the back, it is possible to make the illusion that the fixed decoration moves, which surprises the player and the two first decorative bodies after the back. It is possible to further enjoy the movable effect by the 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 after the back.

Further, as described above, since the two lower back first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are prevented from rotating backward from the rotation axis on which the hinge can be rotated, two of them are used. Since the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back can be arranged at the rear position as much as possible with respect to the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), two. By arranging the two back-bottom rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the back-lower rear second decorative body 3120 at the rear positions as much as possible, the two back-lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the back-lower rear second decorative body 3110 It is possible to secure a space on the front side for rotating the 3120 by hinges, and it is possible to reliably perform a movable effect by the two back lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back rear second decorative body 3120, and the front By increasing the space on the side, the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body after the back can be made larger, and the large first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative after the back can be made larger. The body 3120 can attract the attention of the player and make the movable effect more enjoyable.

Further, since the slide unit 3150 is used to move the two back lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back rear second decorative body 3120 in the left-right direction, the slide guide 3152 that guides the two in the left-right direction provides two. It is possible to support the weights of the lower back first decorative body 3110, the lower back second decorative body 3120, and the rotation drive unit 3130, and the two lower back first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3110 can be supported. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the weight of the body 3120 or the like to act on the third drive motor 3155 after the back bottom for moving, the slide unit 3150 can be made smaller than the case where the weight of the body 3120 or the like is moved in the vertical direction. It is possible to relatively increase the space for the two back-bottom rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the back-lower rear second decorative body 3120 so that the back-lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back-lower rear second decorative body 3120 are relatively widened. Can be made larger so that the two under-back first decorations 3110 and the under-back second decoration 3120 stand out from the player, and the player can be made two under-back first decorations. The body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom can be noticed, and the movable effect and the light emitting effect by the two decorative bodies 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are surely enjoyed and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Further, an opening penetrating the front view game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) through the two back lower rear first decorative bodies 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 arranged behind the game panel 1100. Since it is arranged in 1112, the space in front of the two lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 can be widened through the opening 1112, so that the hinge can be rotated. The two lower back first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 can be reliably hinged, and the two lower back lower first decorative bodies 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120. The radius of gyration, that is, the size of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom can be made larger, and the pachinko machine 1 that surely achieves the above-mentioned effects is realized. can do.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachislot machine or the gaming machine obtained by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2000 Front unit 2500 Center accessory 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3100 Back bottom movable production unit 3110 Back bottom rear first decorative body (first decorative body, decorative member, decorative unit)
3111 First decorative surface 3112 Second decorative surface 3114 Sub liquid crystal display device (effect display device, decorative member, decorative unit)
3115 First hinge part 3120 Back bottom rear second decorative body (second decorative body, decorative member, decorative unit)
3121 First decorative surface 3122 Second decorative surface 3124 Second hinge part 3125 Decorative body support shaft (support shaft, decorative unit)
3126 Second decorative body side operating gear (under-axis gear, decorative unit)
3127 Bearing member 3130 Rotation drive unit 3131 Rotation drive unit base 3131a Main part 3131b Sub part 3131c Upper bearing part 3131d Lower bearing part 3132 Rotation transmission member 3132a Sleeve part 3132b Connecting part 3132c First decorative body side operating gear (on-axis gear)
3133 First drive gear (upper drive gear)
3134 Back bottom rear first drive motor (upper drive motor, drive motor)
3136 Second drive gear (lower drive gear)
3137 Back bottom rear second drive motor (bottom drive motor, drive motor)
3142 Unit cover 3143 Rack member 3143a Rack gear 3150 Slide unit 3151 Unit base 3152 Slide guide 3153 Transmission gear member 3154 Drive gear 3155 Back bottom rear third drive motor 3157 Slide cover

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that draws lots based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and gives profits based on the result of the lottery.
A light emitting portion capable of emitting light during the execution of the effect relating to the result of the lottery is mounted, and a light emitting decorative substrate provided with a white reflection improving region capable of improving the reflection effect on the substrate surface is provided.
The light emitting decorative substrate includes a front light emitting decorative substrate and a rear light emitting decorative substrate arranged behind the front light emitting decorative substrate.
The reflection improving region is at least a surface portion of the surface portion of the rear light emitting decorative substrate on which the light emitting portion is mounted and a surface facing the surface portion, and the light emitting portion of the surface portion of the front light emitting decorative substrate. It is provided on the back side where the part is not mounted,
Further, a translucent member having translucency is provided on the back surface side of the front light emitting decorative substrate.
The translucent member is fixed to the front light emitting decorative substrate on the back surface side of the front light emitting decorative substrate, and further extends outward from the edge of the back surface portion of the front light emitting decorative substrate. It has an extended translucent part and
The game machine is characterized in that the extended light-transmitting portion can be located in front of the rear-emitting decorative substrate so that light from the light-emitting portion of the rear-emitting decorative substrate can be transmitted.

Images